Toshiba 6F3B0253 Sprinkler User Manual

6F3B0253

UM-TS01

∗∗∗

-E031

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

PROSEC

T116S

USER’S MANUAL

−−−−

Basic Hardware and Function

−−−−

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

Important Information

Misuse of this equipment can result in property damage or human injury.

Because controlled system applications vary widely, you should satisfy yourself as to the acceptability of this equipment for your intended purpose.

In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for either indirect or consequential damage or injury that may result from the use of this equipment.

No patent liability is assumed by Toshiba Corporation with respect to use of information, illustrations, circuits, equipment or examples of application in this publication.

Toshiba Corporation reserves the right to make changes and improvements to this publication and/or related products at any time without notice. No obligation shall be incurred other than as noted in this publication.

This publication is copyrighted and contains proprietary material. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means



electrical, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise



without obtaining prior written permission from Toshiba Corporation.

6F3B0253

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Publication number: UM-TS01

∗∗∗

-E031

1st edition April 2001, 2nd edition November 2001

6F3B0253

CE Marking

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual.

The contents of the conformity are shown below.

Application of

Council Directive

Manufacture ’ s Name

EMC :

LVD :

89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC)

72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC)

Address

Toshiba Corporation,

Fuchu Operations-Social Infrastructure Systems

1, Toshiba-Cho

Fuchu-shi

TOKYO 183-8511

Japan

declares, that the product

Product Name

Model Number

Programmable Controller , T1-16S

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C

TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

EMC

Radiated Interference

Mains Interference

EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

Radiated Susceptibility :

ENV50140

Conducted RFI Susceptibility :

ENV50141, IEC100-4-6.

Electrostatic Discharge :

IEC1000-4-2

Electrical Fast Transient :

IEC1000-4-4

LVD :

EN61131-2:1995 3.10

Dielectric Properties

Mechanical Requirements

Supplementary information :

(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S.

(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration.

(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

UL/c-UL Listing

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) is UL/c-UL listed as shown below.

UL and c-UL Listing

File Number :

Product Name :

Product Covered :

E95637

Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Main Unit

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C,

TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C

I/O module

TDI116M*S, TDD116M*S, TDO116M*S,

TAD121M*S, TAD131M*S, TDA121M*S, TDA131M*S,

TFR112M*S

Peripherals

TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S

UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations

File Number :

Product Name :

Product Covered :

E184034

Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Main Unit

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Locations Class :

Important Notice :

1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I,

DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS ONLY.

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF

COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,

DIVISION 2.

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT

EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF

OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions

This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1-16S.

Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1-16S. Also, keep this manual and related manuals so that you can read them anytime while the T1-16S is in operation.

General Information

1. The T1-16S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial environment. However, the T1-16S is not intended to be used for systems which may endanger human life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1-16S for a special application, such as transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space systems, nuclear controls, submarine systems, etc.

2. The T1-16S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep safety of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside the T1-16S.

3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1-16S, it is assumed that the users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems.

If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to this product could result.

4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable

Controllers and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any questions about this manual.

5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the operations and applications of the T1-16S. You should test completely if you use them as a part of your application system.

Hazard Classifications

In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety precautions.

!

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on the situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions

Installation:

CAUTION

1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T1-

16S and related equipment in the environment described in this manual.

2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions described in this manual.

3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks, terminal blocks or battery. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-

16S and related equipment.

4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into the T1-16S and related equipment during installation and wiring.

5. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair.

Contact Toshiba for repairing.

Wiring:

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.

4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described in the manual.

5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local regulations on wiring and grounding.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions

Operation:

WARNING

1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1-16S.

Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents.

CAUTION

2. Operate the T1-16S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock.

3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during operation, carefully check for safety.

4. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

5. Do not use any modules of the T1-16S for the purpose other than specified. This can cause electrical shock or injury.

6. Do not modify the T1-16S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can cause fire, electrical shock or injury.

7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously.

Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S.

8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs.

Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact can cause malfunction or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

Safety Precautions

Maintenance:

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires.

Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down.

3. Touch a grounded metal part to discharge the static electricity on your body before touching the equipment.

4. Otherwise, charged static electricity on your body can cause malfunction or failure.

5. Do not disassemble the T1-16S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside.

6. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles.

7. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed.

Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.

8. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded.

9. The battery used in T1-16S may present a risk of fire of chemical burn if mistreated.

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100ºC (212ºF), or incinerate.

10. Replace battery with CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.

11. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

T1-16S User’s Manual

Safety Precautions

Safety Label

The safety label as shown on the right is attached to the power terminal of the

T1-16S.

Remove the mount paper before wiring.

Peel off the label from the mount paper and stick it near the power terminals where it can be readily seen.

Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not touch terminals while power on.

Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death.

Do not touch terminals while power on.

Read related manual thoroughly for safety.

Stick this seal on unit or near unit.

Take off this sheet before wiring.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

About This Manual

This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller

T1-16S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment.

This manual introduces the T1-16S, and explains the system configuration, specifications, installation and wiring for T1-16S’s basic hardware. This manual provides the information for designing T1-16S user program, such as the internal operation, memory configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for maintenance and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual.

The T1-16S’s computer link function and T1-16S’s multi-purpose communication functions are covered by the separate manual. Read the T1-16S User’s Manual -

Communication Function - for details.

Inside This Manual

This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix.

Section 1 outlines the T1-16S configuration. To fully understand the T1-16S, it is important to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in designing external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with software. Section 8 explains the T1-16S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10 describe the maintenance procedure for the T1-16S, to ensure safe operation and long service life.

Related Manuals

The following related manuals are available for T1-16S. Besides this manual, read the following manuals for your better understanding.

T1-16S User’s Manual

- Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual)

- I/O Modules -

UM-TS01

∗∗∗

-E031

UM-TS01

∗∗∗

-E034

- Communication Function -

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual

UM-TS01

∗∗∗

-E033

UM-TS03

∗∗∗

-E025

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual

UM-TS03

∗∗∗

-E045

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

About This Manual

Terminology

The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual.

I/O

LED

LSB ms

MSB

PWM

RAM

ROM

Vac

Vdc

µµµµ

ASCII

microsecond

American Standard Code For Information Interchange

AWG

BCC

CCW

CPU

American Wire Gage

Block Check Code

Counter-Clockwise

Central Processing Unit

Clockwise

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory hexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string)

Input/Output

Light Emitting Diode

Least Significant Bit millisecond

Most Significant Bit

Pulse Width Modulation

Random Access Memory

Read Only Memory

AC voltage

DC voltage

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

Contents

3.1

3.2

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

Safety Precautions

About This Manual

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

..................................................................................

System Configuration

....................................................................

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

Introducing the T1-16S ................................................................

Features ..............................................................................................

System configuration ..........................................................................

I/O expansion ......................................................................................

Components ........................................................................................

1.5.1

Basic unit .........................................................................................

1.5.2

I/O modules ......................................................................................

1.5.3

Options ............................................................................................

1.6

Programmer port function ..................................................................

1.7

1.8

1.9

RS-485 port communication function .................................................

Real-time data link system .................................................................

Peripheral tools ..................................................................................

Specifications ..................................................................................

General specifications ........................................................................

Functional specifications ....................................................................

I/O specifications ................................................................................

External dimensions ...........................................................................

I/O Application Precautions

..........................................................

Application precautions for input signals ............................................

Application precautions for output signals ..........................................

Installation and Wiring

...................................................................

Environmental conditions ...................................................................

Installing the unit .................................................................................

Wiring terminals ..................................................................................

Grounding ...........................................................................................

Power supply wiring ............................................................................

I/O wiring ............................................................................................

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Contents

5.1

5.2

5.3

Operating System Overview

.........................................................

Operation modes ................................................................................

About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................

Scanning .............................................................................................

Programming Information

.............................................................

6.1

6.2

6.3

Devices and registers .........................................................................

Index modification ...............................................................................

Real-time clock/calendar ....................................................................

6.4

6.5

I/O allocation .......................................................................................

T1-16S memory mode setting..............................................................

6.6

User program configuration ................................................................

6.6.1

Main program ..................................................................................

6.6.2

Sub-program #1 ..............................................................................

6.6.3

Timer interrupt program ..................................................................

6.6.4

I/O interrupt programs .....................................................................

6.6.5

Subroutines ....................................................................................

6.7

Programming language ......................................................................

6.8

6.9

Program execution sequence ............................................................

On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 100

6.10

Password protection ........................................................................... 103

Instructions ...................................................................................... 105

7.1

7.2

List of instructions .............................................................................. 106

Instruction specifications .................................................................... 116

Special I/O Functions

.................................................................... 255

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

8.1

8.2

8.3

Special I/O function overview ............................................................. 256

Variable input filter constant .............................................................. 260

High speed counter ............................................................................ 261

8.3.1

Single phase up-counter ................................................................. 262

8.3.2

Single phase speed-counter ............................................................ 263

8.3.3

Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................ 265

8.4

Interrupt input function ........................................................................ 268

8.5

8.6

8.7

Analog setting function ....................................................................... 270

Pulse output function .......................................................................... 271

PWM output function .......................................................................... 273

Maintenance and Checks

.............................................................. 275

Precautions during operation ............................................................. 276

Daily checks ........................................................................................ 277

Periodic checks ................................................................................... 278

Maintenance parts ............................................................................... 279

Battery ................................................................................................. 280

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

Contents

10.

Troubleshooting

.............................................................................. 281

10.1

Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................ 282

10.1.1

Power supply check ......................................................................... 283

10.1.2

CPU check ....................................................................................... 284

10.1.3

Program check ................................................................................. 284

10.1.4

Input check ....................................................................................... 285

10.1.5

Output check .................................................................................... 286

10.1.6

Environmental problem .................................................................... 287

10.2

Self-diagnostic items .......................................................................... 288

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 293

A.1

A.2

List of models and types ..................................................................... 294

Instruction index ................................................................................. 295

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 1 System Configuration

1.1

Introducing the T1-16S, 14

1.2

Features, 16

1.3

System configuration, 19

1.4

I/O expansion, 20

1.5

Components, 21

1.6

Computer link system, 27

1.7

T1-16S Communication function, 28

1.8

Real-time data link system, 32

1.9

Peripheral tools, 33

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S

The T1-16 is compact, block style, high-performance programmable controller with a range of 16 to 144 input and output points.

The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 16 types.

T1 Series T1 T1-16 T1-MDR16

T1-MAR16

T1-MDR16D

T1-MAR28

T1-MDR28D

T1-MAR40

T1-MDR40D

T1-MDR16SC

T1-MDR16SSD

T1-MDR16SCD

T1-MAR40S

T1-MDR40SD

I/O points:

The T1 Series are available in five models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40, T1-40S and T1-

16S. Each model has the following I/O points.

Input

Output

T1-16

8 points

T1-16S

8 points

(6 relay plus 2 slid-state)

Expansion No

Up to 8 I/O modules.

Total up to

144 points.

T1-28

14 points

(12 relay plus

2 slid-state)

T1-40

24 points

16 points

T1-40S

(14 relay plus 2 solid-state)

2 option cards plus

1 expansion rack or unit.

Total up to 382 points.

The T1-16S can expand its I/O points by connecting I/O modules . Up to eight I/O modules can be connected. If eight 16-point I/O modules are connected to the T1-

16S, it can control up to 144 points.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Memory capacity:

Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps.

Whole the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM.

Memory

Program capacity

RAM back-up

(at 25°C)

(at 77°F)

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S

RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up)

2 k steps

Data capacity Auxiliary relay: 1024 points

Timer: 64 points

Counter: 64 points

Data register: 1024 words

EEPROM back-up

Program and leading 512 words of Data register

8 k steps

(4 k mode or 8 k mode)

Auxiliary relay: 4096 points

Timer:

Counter:

256 points

Data register: 4096 words

Program and the user specified range of

Data register (0 to 2048 words)

Capacitor: 6 hours or more Capacitor: 168 hours or more

T1-16S

Capacitor: 1 hour or more

Battery: 2 years or more

Control functions:

In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its highspeed counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions allow its application to a wide scope of control systems.

Language

Number of instructions

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S

Ladder diagram with function block

Basic: 17 types

Function: 76 types

Basic: 21 types

Function: 99 types

T1-16S

Basic: 21 types

Function: 97 types

Subroutines clock/calendar

16 256

(nesting not allowed) (up to 3 levels of nesting)

Execution speed

1.4

µ s/contact, 2.3

µ s/coil, 4.2

µ s/transfer, 6.5

µ s/addition

Real-time

No Yes (year, month, day, week, hours, minutes, seconds)

Communication

RS-232C

(programmer port)

RS-232C (programmer port),

RS-485 (multi-purpose)

Construction:

The T1-16S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The

T1-16S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-16S has modular expandability. The T1-16S provides flexibility into the block style controller.

Series compatibility:

Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2,

T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.2 Features

I/O module support:

The T1-16S has an interface for connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight modules can be connected to the T1-16S.

By using the 16 points I/O module, the T1-16S can control up to 144 I/O points.

Built-in high-speed counter:

Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The acceptable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only)

Built-in analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. This allows operators to adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver.

High speed processing:

Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations.

The T1-16S is designed to meet these requirements.

•

1.4

µ s per contact

•

4.2

µ s per 16-bit transfer

•

2.3

6.5

µ s per coil s per 16-bit addition

The T1-16S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows immediate operation independent of program scan.

High performance software:

The T1-16S offers 21 basic ladder instructions and 97 function instructions.

Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative real PID, etc. are standard on the T1-16S. These functions allow the T1-16S to be applied to the most demanding control applications.

Battery-less operation:

The T1-16S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM, providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation.

This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for changing the battery every few years.

(Optional battery is also available to back-up real-time clock and retentive data)

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Pulse output / PWM output:

One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an analog output. (DC input type only)

Built-in computer link function:

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator interface unit, etc.

The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The none parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using modems, remote programming/monitoring is available.

Real-time control data link network:

By connecting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M) to the T1 -16S, highspeed data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC model (T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-16Ss can be connected as remote. Each T1-16S can exchange data with the master through 1 word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750 kbps or 250 kbps.

Sampling trace function:

The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user specified timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the programmer screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful for checking the input signals changing.

Password protection:

By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the security levels required for your application.

Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited

Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited

Level 2: Writing program is prohibited

Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level)

Two points of solid-state output:

Each model of the T1-16S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC input type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for frequent switching application.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

DIN rail mounting:

The T1-16S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail.

The T1-16S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting.

On-line program changes:

When the T1-16S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode) program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in

EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program debugging stage.

Real-time clock/calendar function: (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the week, hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled operations, data gathering with time stamps, etc. To back-up the real-time clock/calendar data, use of the optional battery is recommended.

RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one of the following communication modes can be selected.

••••

Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode.

Up to 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode,

MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured.

••••

Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special programming.

••••

Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial

ASCII device can be directly connected.

••••

Inverter connection mode: This mode is specially provided to communicate with

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 series. By using this function, the T1-16S can control and monitor the connected Inverters.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.3 System configuration

The following figure shows the T1-16S system configuration.

MMI/SCADA system

IBM-PC compatible personal computer

Peripheral tool

IBM-PC compatible personal computer

Inverter

T-PDS software

Handy programmer

HP911A

RS232C

RS485 (Standard type only)

T1-16S basic unit

T1-16S

I/O modules

Computer link function

MMI/SCADA system

8 modules max.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.4 I/O expansion

The T1-16S provides I/O expandability by connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight

I/O modules can be connected.

Available I/O modules

DI116M: 16 points DC input

DO116M: 16 points DC output

DD116M: 8 points DC input + 8 points DC output

RO108M: 8 points relay output

AD121M: 1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA)

AD131M: 1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V)

DA121M: 1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA)

DA131M: 1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V)

TC111M: 1 channel thermocouple input (type K, J, E, or

50mV)

FR112M: TOSLINE-F10 remote station

T1-16S maximum configuration

T1-16S main unit

Up to 8 I/O modules

NOTE

(1) The 5Vdc power to the I/O modules is supplied from the main unit. The main unit can supply maximum 1.5A of the 5Vdc power to the I/O modules. Check the current consumption of each I/O module used. Refer to section 2.1.

(2) The connecting order of the I/O modules is not restricted except TOSLINE-

F10 remote station FR112M. When the FR112M is used, it must be the right end module.

(3) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, the T1-16S cannot operate normally.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.5 Components

1.5.1

Basic unit

The T1-16S is available in four types as shown in the following table.

Type

T1-MDR16SS

(Enhanced model)

T1-MDR16SC

(Standard model)

T1-MDR16SSD

(Enhanced model)

T1-MDR16SCD

(Standard model)

Link/ Calendar Power supply

Yes

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

Yes

24 Vdc

Input Output

8 points - 24 Vdc 6 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

Link terminals

(Enhanced model only)

Operation status LEDs

I/O status LEDs (Low side)

Mounting hole

Programmer port cover

Battery holder cover

Power supply and input/output terminals

Expantion connector

I/O status LEDs (High side)

Basic Hardware and Function

1. System Configuration

♦

Behind the programmer port cover

PRG

Programmer port connector

Analog setting adjusters

(V0 and V1)

V0 V1

H/R

Mode control switch

(HALT / RUN)

Battery holder

Battery type: CR2032

(Optional)

A tab for battery eject

Power supply terminals:

Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3.

See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring.

Input terminals:

Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for details.

Output terminals:

Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for details.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

I/O status LEDs:

Indicates the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal. (color: red)

SW54 setting value

0 (default)

Others

I/O intending for an indication

Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)

I/O module slot 0

I/O module slot 1

I/O module slot 2

I/O module slot 3

I/O module slot 4

I/O module slot 5

I/O module slot 6

I/O module slot 7

TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), Low 1 word

TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), High 1 word

Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)

Operation status LEDs:

Indicates the operation status of the T1-16S.

Note

It indicates these at the time of only RUN mode.

FLT

RUN

PWR

PWR Lit

(Power) (green)

Not lit

RUN (green) Lit

Internal 5 Vdc power is normal.

Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal.

RUN mode (in operation)

Blinking HOLD mode

Not lit HALT mode or ERROR mode

FLT

(Fault) (red)

Lit ERROR mode

Blinking Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected)

Not lit Normal

Mode control switch:

Controls the operation modes of the T1-16S.

H (HALT)

R (RUN)

When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1-16S stops program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is disabled.

When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1-16S starts program execution. This is the position during normal operation.

In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also available.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the

V1 value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section

8.5 for details of the analog setting function.

Programmer port connector:

Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information about the computer link function.

Expansion connector:

Used to connect the I/O module.

RS-485 port (Enhanced model only):

Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1-16S, or many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485 interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1-16S’s RS-485 multipurpose communication functions.

Mounting holes:

Used to fix the T1-16S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are provided at two opposite corners.

Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.

DIN rail bracket:

The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1-16S on a 35 mm DIN rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.5.2

I/O modules

The T1-16S can connect up to eight I/O modules.

The following 10 types of the I/O modules are available.

For specification details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S

User’s Manual

−

I/O Modules

−

“.

Type

DI116M

DO116M

DD116M

RO108M

AD121M

AD131M

DA121M

DA131M

TC111M

FR112M

Description

16 points input, 24Vdc – 5mA

16 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA

8 points input, 24Vdc - 5mA

+ 8 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA

8 points relay output, 24Vdc/240Vac - 1A

1 channel analog input, 0 to 5V / 0 to 20mA

1 channel analog input,

10V

1 channel analog output, 0 to 20mA

1 channel analog output,

10V

1 channel thermo-couple input

TOSLINE-F10 remote station,

1 word input + 1 word output

Power supply

Supplied from the basic unit (5 Vdc)

FR112M Other I/O modules

Expantion connector Expantion connectors

NOTE

(1) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, T1-16S cannot operate normally.

(2) The TOSLINE-F10 remote station module (FR112M) must be connected at the right end. Tow or more FR112Ms cannot be used together.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.5.3

Options

The following optional items are available.

Type Item

Cable for programming tool

Programmer port connector

Option card I/O connector

Back-up battery

CJ105

PT16S

Description

For T-PDS, 5 m length

For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable

PT15S

PT15F

Cable side connector for

DI116M, DO116M, or DD116M

Soldering type

Flat cable type

CR2032 For memory back up. (Available on the market.)

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.6 Programmer port function

The interface of the T1-16S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is used to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the computer link function.

The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator interface unit and the T1-16S. The data in the T1-16S can be read and written by creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol of the T1-16S is published in “T1-16S User’s Manual

−

Communication Function

−

”.

Item

Interface

Transmission system

Synchronization

Transmission speed

Transmission distance

Framing

Specifications

Conforms to RS-232C

Half-duplex

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

9600 bps (fixed)

15 m max.

Start bit: 1 bit

Data bits: 8 bits (fixed)

Parity: Odd or none

Stop bit: 1 bit (fixed)

Protocol T-series computer link (ASCII)

Programmer (binary)

Transmission delay option 0 to 300 ms

By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1-16Ss can be connected on an

RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this configuration.

Operator Interface

Master Computer

RS-232C

T1-16S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

T1-16S

Max. 32 T1-16Ss

T1-16S

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.7 RS-485 port communication function

The T1-16S enhanced model has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port.

This port can work independent of the programmer port.

By using this communication port, one of the following four communication modes is available, computer link mode, data link mode, free ASCII mode, and Inverter connection mode.

For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual

−

Communication Function

−

”.

Data link Item

Synchronization

Computer link

Free ASCII

Interface Conforms to RS-458

Transmission system Half-duplex

Inverter connection

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

Transmission code

Transmission speed

Transmission distance

Framing

ASCII/binary

19200 bps

1 km max.

Start bit:

ASCII

1 bit

Binary

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or

Binary

19200 bps

(fixed)

Special

Protocol

Link configuration

Data bits: 7 or 8 bits

Parity: Odd, even, or none

Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits

T-series computer link (ASCII),

Programmer

(binary)

1-to-N

User defined

ASCII messages

N/A

Inverter VF-

A7/G7/S9 binary protocol

1-to-N

Special

1-to-1

NOTE

T1-16S standard model does not have the RS-485 interface.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Computer link mode

T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer.

By using this mode, all the T1-16S’s data can be accessed by a master computer.

The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this configuration.

Master Computer

RS-485 (1 km max.) Max. 32 T1-16Ss

T1-16S T1-16S T1-16S T1-16S

Data link mode

Two PLCs (any combination of T1-16S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together.

This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special programming. Data registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer.

T1S

T1-16S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Station No. 1

D0000

D0015

D0016

D0031

Station No. 2

D0000

D0015

D0016

D0031

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Free ASCII mode

The free ASCII mode is used to connect between the T1-16S and various serial

ASCII devices, such as a micro computer, bar code reader, printer, display, etc.

By using this mode, the T1-16S can work as a communication master. Therefore, the

T1-16S can communicate with other PLCs using the computer link protocol.

T1-16S

RS-485 (1 km max.)

•

Bar-code reader

•

ID system

•

Weigh scale

•

Power meter

•

Printer

•

Others

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Free ASCII mode

The T1-16S's Inverter connection mode is a special function to monitor/control the

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 through the RS-485 line.

Using this mode, the T1-16S can perform the following functions for the Inverters connected on the RS-485 line without any special communication program.

•

Monitoring

−

Operating frequency and Terminal status

•

Control

−

Run/Stop/Jog, Forward/Reverse, Frequency reference, etc.

•

Parameter read/write

•

Broadcast command

T1-16S

888 888

VF-A7 VF-A7

888

RS-485 (1 km max.)

RS485 adapter

888

VF-S9 VF-S9

888 888

VF-S9 VF-S9

(Max. 64 Inverters)

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.8 Real-time data link system

TOSLINE-F10

TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M), the

T1-16S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10 network. On this network, the T1-16S sends 1 word data to the master station and receives 1 word data from the master station.

Item

Topology

Transmission distance

(without repeater)

Transmission speed

Scan transmission capacity

Scan cycle

Error checking

TOSLINE-F10 system specifications

High speed mode Long distance mode

Bus (terminated at both ends)

500 m max. (total) 1 km max. (total)

750 kbps

512 points (32 words) max.

250 kbps

7 ms/32 words

CRC check

12 ms/32 words

NOTE

(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual

−

Option Card and I/O

Module

−

“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112).

(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of overall TOSLINE-F10 system.

Typical data link configuration

The figure below shows the typical data link configuration.

Master computer

TOSLINE-F10

T2E

(master)

T1-16S T1-16S T1-16S

T2E

(remote)

RI/O RI/O

RI/O: remote I/O

Operator interface units

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

1.9 Peripheral tools

The following peripheral tools are available for the T1-16S.

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS)

The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on any IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers.

The same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and program documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S,

T2/T2E/T2N, T3/T3H and S2T.

•

User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace, program block move/copy, etc.

•

Group

−

part program development by multiple designers and merging them into a complete program

−

enhance the software productivity.

•

Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program debugging.

•

Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work easy.

•

Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible.

The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1-16S.

Type Part number

T-PDS for Windows TMW33E1SS

T-PDS for MS-DOS TMM33I1SS

Versions available for

T1-16/28/40

Ver 1.0 or later

*1)

Ver 1.61 or later

*1)

T1-40S/T1-16S

Ver 1.2 or later

Ver 2.1 or later

*1) The T1-16S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are the following functional limitations.

•

The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the

T1-16S.

•

Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be edited/monitored. (depending on the version)

NOTE

The connection cable for the T1-16S is different from that for upper T-Series

PLCs. These cables are supplied separately.

Connection cable for T1-16S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length

Connection cable for T2/T3

…

. Type: CJ905, 5 m length

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A)

The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1-16S using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote locations.

The HP911A has the following features.

•

The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable controllers T1-16S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3.

•

Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers.

•

Two display modes are available,

- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns

- Zoom: Full device description

•

On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking.

•

Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light.

There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable included with.

Type Part number

HP911A

THP911A

∗

HP911

THP911

∗∗

Cable included with Versions available for T1-16S

2 m cable for T1-16S Ver 1.1 or later

2 m cable for the upper

T-series PLCs

Ver 1.1 or later

The T1-16S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following functional limitations.

•

The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1-

16S.

•

Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be edited/monitored.

NOTE

A 2 m connection cable for the T1-16S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the

HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m length)

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

1. System Configuration

Program Storage Module (RM102)

The program storage module (RM102) is an external memory for storing the T1-16S program. By using the RM102, program saving from the T1-16S to the RM102, and program loading from the RM102 to the T1-16S can be done without need of a programmer.

Because the RM102 has an EEPROM, maintenance-free program storage and quick saving/loading are available.

Multi-drop adapter (CU111)

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port supports the computer link function.

When two or more T1-16Ss are connected with a master computer, the multi-drop adapter

(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration)

The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter specially designed for the T1-16S’s programmer port.

Basic Hardware and Function

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 2 Specifications

2.1

General specifications, 38

2.2

Functional specifications, 40

2.3

I/O specifications, 42

2.4

External dimensions, 46

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

2.1 General specifications

Item

Power supply voltage

Power consumption

Inrush current

Output rating

24Vdc

(24Vdc, ±10%)

(Note)

5Vdc

Power supply voltage

T1-16S

100 to 240Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz

45VA or less

50A or less (at 240Vac, cold start)

0.2A (for external devices and/or for input signals)

1.5A (for I/O module)

24Vdc (+20/-15%)

Power consumption

Inrush current

18W or less

25A or less (at 24Vdc)

5Vdc output rating (Note) 1.5A (for I/O module)

Retentive power interruption 10ms or less

Insulation resistance 10M

Ω

or more

(between power terminals and ground terminal)

Withstand voltage

Ambient temperature

Ambient humidity

Noise immunity

Vibration immunity

Shock immunity

Approximate weight

1500Vac - 1 minute

0 to 55

C (operation), -20 to 75

C (storage)

5 to 95%RH, no condensation

1000Vp-p/1

µ s, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

9.8m/s

(1g)

(for 30 minutes per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)

98m/s

(10g)

(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)

500g

NOTE

(1) 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

(2) The maximum output current of the 5Vdc is 1.5A. However there is the following restrictions, depending on the conditions.

(A)

•

When HP911 is used:

→

Redused by 0.2A

•

When RS-485 port is used:

→

Reduced by 0.1A

•

When 24Vdc service power is used:

→

Refer to the right chart.

1.5

1.0

0.1 0.2 (A)

24Vdc service power

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

NOTE

(3) The 5Vdc current consumption of each I/O modules is described below.

Check that the total 5Vdc current consumption is within the limit.

Model Specifications

DI116M 16points, 24Vdc-5mA input.

DO116M 16points, 24Vdc-100mA output.

DD116M 8points, 24Vdc-5mA input.

8points, 24Vdc-100mA output.

RO108M 8 points, 24Vdc/240Vac – 1A relay output

AD121M 1ch. 12bit analog input.

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)

AD131M 1ch. 12bit analog input. (±10V)

DA121M 1ch. 12bit analog output.

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)

DA131M 1ch. 12bit analog output. (±10V)

TC111M 1ch. 12bit thermo couple input.

FR112M TOSLINE-F10 remote station.

5Vdc consumer current

50mA

260mA

350mA

240mA

400mA

100mA

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

2.2 Functional specifications

Item

Control method

Scan system

T1-16S

Stored program, cyclic scan system

Floating scan or constant scan (10 – 200ms, 10ms units)

I/O update Batch I/O refresh

(direct I/O instruction available at basic unit ’s I/O)

Program memory (Note) RAM and EEPROM (no back-up battery required)

Program capacity

Programming language

Instructions

8K steps

(4K or 8K mode)

Ladder diagram with function block

Execution speed

Program types

Basic: 21

Function: 97

1.4

µ s/contact, 2.3

µ s/coil,

4.2

µ s/16-bit transfer, 6.5

µ s/16-bit addition

1 main program

User data

1 sub-program (initial program)

1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000ms, 5ms units)

4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input)

I/O register

256 subroutines (up to 3 levels of nesting)

512 points/ 32 words (X/XW, Y/YW)

Auxiliary relay 4096 points/ 256 words (R/RW)

Special relay

Timer

1024 points/ 64 words (S/SW)

256 points (T./T)

64 at 0.01s, 192 at 0.1s

Counter

Data register

256 points (C./C)

4096 words (D)

Index register 3 words (I, J, K)

Memory Capacitor 1 hour (at 25°C) back-up

Battery (option) Max. 2 years.

Min. 6 months. (Note)

NOTE

(1) The user program stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM when power is turned on. Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-written by original

EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

(2) The data of RAM and calendar IC are backed up by built-in capacitor and optional battery.

(3) When the optional battery is used, replace the battery periodically with referring to the table below.

Operation Over 8 hours time per day

Under 8 hours

Annual average air temperature

Under 30°C (86°F) Over 30°C (86°F)

2 years 1 year

1 year 6 months

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

Functional specifications (cont’d)

Debug support function

Item

I/O capacity

I/O type Input

Output

I/O terminal block

Real-time clock

/calendar

Special I/O functions

(Note)

Communications interface

T1-16S

16 points (basic)

+128 points (I/O modules)

24Vdc input (8 points)

Relay (6 points) + transistor (2 points)

Fixed

Yes,

60 s/month at 25°C

(Enhanced model only)

•

High speed counter, 2 single or 1 quadrature

•

Interrupt input, 2 points

•

Adjustable analog register, 2 points

•

Pulse output, CW+CCW or pulse+direction

•

PWM output

•

1 port RS-232C (programmer port)

- for Programmer or Computer link connection

•

1 port RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

- Programmer

- Computer link

- Data link

- Free ASCII

•

TOSLINE-F10 remote (by I/O module)

•

Sampling trace, 8 devices and 3 register - 256 times

•

On-line programming

•

On-line EEPROM write

NOTE

(1) High-speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are available in the DC input types.

(2) High-speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously.

(3) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously.

Basic Hardware and Function

2. Specifications

2.3 I/O specifications

•

Input specifications

Input type

Item Specifications

DC input, current source/sink

Number of input points 8 points (8 points/common)

Rated input voltage 24Vdc, +10/-15 %

Rated input current 7mA (at 24Vdc)

Min. ON voltage

Max. OFF voltage

ON delay time

OFF delay time

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

15Vdc

5Vdc

0 to 15ms

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3

1500Vac, 1 minute

(between internal and external circuits)

Internal circuit

LED

*1: User can change the input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input.

The setting range is 0 to 15ms. (Default value = 10ms) Refer to section 8.2.

6F3B0253

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

•

Input signal connections

T1-16S

DC IN

N NC

−

Vin

23 25

22 24 26

Service power

24Vdc

24Vdc input

NOTE

The 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

•

Output specifications

Item Specifications

Output type

Number of output points 6 points

Relay output

Relay contact, normally open

Rated load voltage

(6 pts/common)

240Vac/24Vdc (max.)

Range of load voltage Max. 264Vac/125Vdc

Maximum load current 2A/point (resistive),

ON resistance

4A/common

50m

Ω

or less

(initial value)

Voltage drop at ON

−

Leakage current at OFF None

Minimum load 5Vdc, 10mA

(50mW)

2 points

24Vdc

Transistor output

Transistor output, current sink

(2 points/common)

20.0 - 28.0Vdc

0.5A/point (resistive)

0.5V or less

0.1mA or less

−

ON delay time

OFF delay time

Input signal display

External connection

Withstand voltage

Internal circuit

10ms or less

0.1ms or less

LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

Removable terminal block, M3

1500Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

LED LED

Vin

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.

20 million times or more (mechanical)

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

•

Output signal connections

T1-16S

DC OUT RELAY OUT

−

N NC +

Vin

23 25 27

22 24 26

Service power

24Vdc

240Vac/24Vdc (max.)

24Vdc

Transister output Relay output

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

2. Specifications

2.4 External dimensions

♦

T1-16S

♦

I/O module

T1-16S User’s Manual

[mm]

6F3B0253

Section 3 I/O Application Precautions

3.1

Application precautions for input signals, 48

3.2

Application precautions for output signals, 50

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.1 Application precautions for input signals

!

WARNING

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents.

(1) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal

The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input signal:

Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan

Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan

The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals.

(2) Increasing the contact current

The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current.

Bleeder resistor

T1 input circuit

−

Wattage

(3) Connecting transistor output device

An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1-16S’s input circuit is shown below.

•

For NPN open collector

•

For PNP open collector

T1 input circuit

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions

(4) Countermeasures against leakage current

When a switch with an LED or sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot recognize that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder resistor to reduce input impedance.

Bleeder resistor

T1 input circuit

Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria:

(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage when the sensor is switched off.

(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.2 Application precautions for output signals

!

WARNING

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents

!

CAUTION 1. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads.

Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24Vdc power required for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S.

3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

(1) 2 points of solid-state output

The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on the DC input types.

These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications.

Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are different.

(2) Switching life of output relays

Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage and current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life

(electrical cycles) is shown on the table below.

Load voltage

110Vac, load COS

= 1

110Vac,

COS

= 0.7

220Vac,

COS

= 1

220Vac,

COS

= 0.7

Load current

0.5A

Expected life

(thousand)

340

720

1,600

150

320

700

220

500

1,100

100

210

460

Load voltage

DC 24Vdc, load L/R = 0 ms

Load current

24Vdc,

L/R = 15 ms

48Vdc,

L/R = 0 ms

48Vdc, 0.5A

L/R = 15 ms 0.2A

110Vdc, 0.5A

L/R = 0 ms

110Vdc,

0.2A

L/R = 15 ms 0.1A

0.5A

Expected life

(thousand)

280

600

130

420

200

550

150

350

1,300

150

350

200

420

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

3. I/O Application Precautions

(3) Over-current protection

The output circuit of the T1-16S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the output should be provided by the user.

T1 output

Load

Fuse appropriate to the common current

(4) Output surge protection

Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused by this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load.

T1 output circuit

Load

Surge absorber

Surge absorber:

•

Flywheel diode (for DC output)

Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply

Forward current: Larger than the load current

•

Varistor

The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply

•

CR snubber (for DC or AC output)

R: 0.5 to 1

Ω

per volt coil voltage

C: 0.5 to 1

F per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor)

Basic Hardware and Function

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 4 Installation and Wiring

4.1

Environmental conditions, 54

4.2

Installing the unit, 55

4.3

Wiring terminals, 57

4.4

Grounding, 58

4.5

Power supply wiring, 59

4.6

I/O wiring, 61

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.1 Environmental conditions

!

CAUTION

Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction.

Install and use the T1-16S and related equipment in the environment described in this section.

Do not install the T1-16S in the following locations:

•

Where the ambient temperature drops below 0

C or exceeds 55

•

Where the relative humidity drops below 20% or exceeds 90%.

•

Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes.

•

In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance.

•

In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance.

•

Where there are corrosive or flammable gases.

•

In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles.

•

In locations exposed to direct sunlight.

Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1-16S will be installed:

•

Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels.

This distance must be at least 200mm.

•

If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to correctly ground the enclosures.

•

When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from the other panels or equipment.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.2 Installing the unit

!

CAUTION

1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions described in this section.

2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into the T1 and related equipment during installation and wiring.

NOTE

The T1-16S basic unit and the I/O module come equipped with a bracket at the rear for mounting on a 35mm DIN rail.

Installation precautions:

•

Because the T1-16S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure.

•

Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of heat, such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor.

•

Do not install the unit within 200mm of high-voltage or high-power cables.

•

Allow at least 70mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation.

•

For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a metal plate or similar separator.

•

If high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1-16S, special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4.

•

Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals downside. Do not install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason.

•

Use M4 size screws to mount the T1-16S.

(Recommended torque: 1.47N

⋅ m = 15Kgf

⋅ cm)

Upward

Mount the T1-16S on a vertical panel.

All other mounting positions are not acceptable.

Basic Hardware and Function

4. Installation and Wiring

Dimensions for screw mounting:

6F3B0253

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.3 Wiring terminals

!

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

The terminal screw size of the T1-16S is M3. Use crimp-style terminals of 7mm width or less useable for M3. The terminal block is not removable (fixed).

NOTE

For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3.

T1-MDR16SS .... AC power supply model

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

TXA RXA RXB

TXB TRM SG

T1-MDR16SSD.. DC power supply model

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

TXA RXA RXB

TXB TRM SG

MDR16SS

DC IN DC OUT RELAY OUT

−

Vin

21 23 25 27

20 22 24 26

MDR16SSD

DC IN DC OUT RELAY OUT

NC C

NC NC

Vin

21 23 25 27

20 22 24 26

NOTE

(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire relaying or branching.

(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (the upper terminal block), refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual -

Communication Function -.

The applicable wire size is 0.3mm

(22 AWG) to 1.25mm

(16 AWG). The table below shows the recommended wire size.

Type of signal

Power

Grounding

I/O signals

Recommended wire size

1.25mm

(16 AWG)

1.25mm

(16 AWG)

0.3mm

(22 AWG) to 0.75mm

(18 AWG)

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.4 Grounding

!

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction.

Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.

The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately from other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic equipment with a single-point ground.

Although the T1-16S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions, grounding is important for safety and reliability.

Check the grounding against the following criteria.

1. The T1-16S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current is particularly harmful.

2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected.

Ground the T1-16S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point.

3. Do not connect the ground of the T1-16S to that of high-power systems.

4. Do not use a ground that has unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or ground subject to vibration.

The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1-16S basic unit for grounding purpose.

In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1-16S, the rack mounting screw is used for this purpose.

T1-16S

Mounting panel

System ground

•

1.25mm

(16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1-16S and the expansion rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar.

•

100

Ω

or less to ground is required.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.5 Power supply wiring

!

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described below.

Wire the power source to the T1-16S power supply terminals.

Line filter

Insulation transformer

Power source

T1-16S

•

Power

Rated voltage

Frequency

Power consumption

Retentive power interruption

AC power supply type

100 to 240Vac, +10/-15%

50/60Hz,

45VA or less

DC power supply type

24Vdc, +20/-15%

18W or less

Continuous operation for less than 10ms

•

1.25mm

(16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable.

•

The power cable should be separated from other cables.

Basic Hardware and Function

4. Installation and Wiring

Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below.

•

100-240Vac

∼

L N

100 to 240Vac

•

DC supply

Grounding

24 Vdc

+ -

24Vdc

Grounding

6F3B0253

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

4. Installation and Wiring

4.6 I/O wiring

!

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

•

Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O terminals.

•

0.75mm

(18 AWG) to 0.3mm

(22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals.

•

Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200mm.

•

If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and

I/O signal cables by or unit at least 50mm.

•

It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables.

Input signal

T1-16S

200mm or more

Output signal

High-power cable

Basic Hardware and Function

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 5 Operating System Overview

5.1

Operation modes, 64

5.2

About the built-in EEPROM, 66

5.3

Scanning, 69

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

5.1 Operation modes

The T1-16S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and the ERROR mode. The T1-16S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for system checking.

RUN:

The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode.

In this mode, the T1-16S reads external signals, executes the user program stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to the user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1-16S performs scans the user program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC.

Program changes and EEPROM write are possible while the T1-16S is in the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9.

HALT:

The HALT mode is a programming mode.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are switched off.

Program loading into the T1-16S is possible only in the HALT mode.

For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only when the T1 is in the HALT mode.

ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shutdown mode as a result of self-diagnosis.

The T1-16S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by selfdiagnosis. In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are switched off. The cause of the shutdown can be confirmed by connecting the programming tool.

To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again.

HOLD:

The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be established by setting any data by using the programming tool.

RUN-F:

The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking.

This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os.

Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation even if the registered I/O modules are not actually mounted.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1-16S and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool.

The mode transition conditions are shown below.

(Power ON) n o

RUN t

HOLD s t s

RUN-F p p q r p u

HALT

ERROR n

Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.

Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side.

Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from the programming tool.

Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from the programming tool.

Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool.

HOLD command is issued from the programming tool.

HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool.

Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool.

(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis.

NOTE

The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM

The T1-16S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features.

The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be maintained without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be stored in the EEPROM.

The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM.

T1-16S

User program Entire program (8 k steps) and System information

User data User specified number of Data register starting with address 0.

It is set by SW55.

D0000 - Dnnnn

Setting information

(up to 2048 words)

SW36 - SW38:

Programmer port settings

SW55:

Number of Data register to be saved in the EEPROM

SW56 - SW57:

RS-485 port settings

Sampling trace setting information

The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM are transferred to the RAM when power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM contents. Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents.

Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is overwritten by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

EEPROM RAM

User program

(8 k steps) and System info c d

User program

(8 k steps) and System info

Data register

(0 to 2048 words, user setting)

Other data

Data register

(D0000 to Dnnnn, user setting)

Other data

The rest of Data register and other registers c

Executed when power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read command is issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible only in the HALT mode.

Executed when EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool.

It is possible in either HALT or RUN mode. (See Note)

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers to be stored in the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048.

The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data registers saved in the EEPROM.

SW55 setting value

2047

2048

Others

Range of Data registers saved in EEPROM

None

D0000 only

D0000 to D0001

D0000 to D0002

D0000 to D2046

D0000 to D2047

Remarks

Default value

Regarded as 2048

When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value of

SW55 and saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value.

The value of SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM.

At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to the Data registers of the RAM.

NOTE

(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of

EEPROM Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm flag (S007) comes ON.

(2) Even in RUN mode, the EEPROM Write command can be executed.

However, in this case, only the user program is written into the

EEPROM. (D register data and setting information are not saved.)

(3) The data in the EEPROM can also be read or written by using the program instruction (FUN236 XFER instruction).

(4) When the EEPROM writing is executed by the XFER instruction in the user program, T1-16S does not update the internal EEPROM write counts. Therefore the EEPROM alarm flag (S007) will not correspond to this operation. Pay attention to the life limit of the EEPROM.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

5.3 Scanning

The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1-16S from the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows, executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support.

Power ON

Hardware check

Initial load

Power-up

Initialization

(approx. 1 s)

Scan

Self-diagnosis

Mode control

RUN mode

HALT mode

At the first scan

Program check

At the first scan

I/O update

Timer update

User program execution

Peripheral support

Scan cycle

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

Hardware check:

Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the peripheral LSIs.

Initial load:

Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to section 5.2)

Register/device initialization:

Initializes registers and devices as shown below.

External input (X/XW) Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

External output (Y/YW) Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Auxiliary device/register User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices

(R/RW)

Special device/register are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

(S/SW)

Timer device/register

(T./T)

Counter device/register

(C./C)

Data register (D)

User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Index register (I, J, K)

User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Cleared to 0.

NOTE

(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the initialization.

(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by built-in capacitor and by the optional battery if used. The back-up period is 1 hours or more at 25 °C. If optional battery (CR2032) is used, the back-up period is 1 year or more at 25 °C.

The T1-16S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to

ON. Therefore, check the status of S00F in the user program and initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON.

(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T,

C and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated address for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the separate manual for the programming tool for setting the retentive registers.

(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program debugging. For details, refer to section 6.7.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

Self-diagnosis:

Checks the proper operation of the T1-16S itself. If an error has detected and cannot be recovered by re-tries, the T1-16S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis items, refer to section 10.2.

Mode control:

Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from the programming tool.

The scan mode

−

floating scan or fixed-time scan

−

is also controlled hear.

NOTE

The floating scan:

When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time is shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status.

Scan time Scan time Scan time

The fixed-time scan:

The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting range is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time than the setting time, it works as the floating scan.

Scan time (50 ms fixed) Scan time (50 ms fixed)

(idling) (idling)

Program check:

At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is checked.

I/O update:

Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next

I/O update timing.

The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation.

Timer update:

Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing devices (S040 to S047).

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

5. Operating System Overview

User program execution:

Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction.

This is the essential function of the T1-16S.

In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program types, such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5.

Peripheral support:

Supports the communications with the programming tool or external devices connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixedtime scan mode.

If the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority mode is selected.

In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is not limited. As the result, the communication response is improved although the scan time becomes long at the time.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 6 Programming Information

6.1

Devices and registers, 74

6.2

Index modification, 86

6.3

Real-time clock/calendar, 88

6.4

I/O allocation, 89

6.5

T1-16S memory mode setting, 91

6.6

User program configuration, 92

6.7

Programming language, 98

6.8

Program execution sequence, 99

6.9

On-line debug support functions, 100

6.10 Password protection, 103

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.1 Devices and registers

The T1-16S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF information, such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit) instructions, such as those for data transfer and arithmetic operations.

Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers are used to store 16-bit data.

Devices are divided into six types:

X External input devices

Y External output devices

R Auxiliary relay devices

S Special devices

Timer devices

C. Counter devices

Registers are divided into eight types:

XW External input registers

YW External output registers

RW Auxiliary relay registers

SW Special registers

Timer registers

Counter registers

D Data registers

I, J, K Index registers

Device and register numbers

X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X004, for example, represents the number 4 bit in the XW00 register.

XW00

Bit position / Number

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X004

Thus, "X004 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW00 is 1.

Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Addressing devices

A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consist of a register number and bit position as follows.

X 00 4

Represents bit position 0 to F in the register.

Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding device.

Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S)

As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as follows.

T. 12

Corresponding register number. (decimal number)

Represents the type of device. (T. or C.)

Dot (.) is used to identify as device.

Addressing registers

A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows.

XW 01

Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D)

The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number.

I, J, or K

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Available address range

Device/register

External input device

External output device

External input register

External output register

Auxiliary relay device

Auxiliary relay register

Special device

Special register

Timer device

Timer register

Counter device

Counter register

Data register

Index register

Symbol T1-16S

Number of points Address range

Total 512 points

Total 32 words

R 4096 points

RW 256 words

S 1024 points

SW 64 words

256 points

256 words

256 points

256 words

4096 words

1 word

X000 - X31F

Y020 - Y31F

XW00 - XW31

YW02 - YW31

R000 - R255F

RW000 - RW255

S000 - S63F

SW00 - SW63

T.000 - T.255

T000 - T255

C.000 - C.255

C000 - C255

D0000 - D4095

I (no address)

J (no address)

K (no address)

NOTE

(1) 1 word = 16 bits

(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to

H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers.

The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter register is 0 to 65535.

(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers.

In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data.

(MSB) F -------------0 F ------------ 0 (LSB)

D0101 D0100

Upper 16bits Lower 16bits

In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘

⋅

’.

For example, D0101

⋅

D0100.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

External input devices (X)

These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the input circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program.

External output devices (Y)

The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external devices through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program.

External input registers (XW)

These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values, which are received from the input circuits.

External output registers (YW)

These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values, which are sent to the output circuits.

Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW)

The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences.

The auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function instructions. The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is necessary to move the data to Y/YW.

It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a power failure. See section 5.3.

Timer devices and registers (T./T)

The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers.

0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided.

Time base

0.01 s

0.1 s

T1-16S

T000 to T063

T064 to T255

The timer devices (T.) work as the output of the timer instructions.

It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a power failure. See section 5.3.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Counter devices and registers (C./C)

The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT) and the up-down counter (U/D) instructions.

The counter devices (C.) work as the output of the counter instructions.

It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a power failure. See section 5.3.

Data registers (D)

Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW) except that the D registers cannot be used as devices.

A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and transferred into the RAM at the initial load.

The range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM can be specified by SW55.

See section 5.2.

It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a power failure. See section 5.3.

Index registers (I, J, and K)

These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register.

For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates

D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2.

D0000 D0100 if I=100

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Special devices and registers (S/SW)

The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See list below.

Device/ register

S000

S001

S002

S003

S004

S005

S006

S007

S008

S009

S00A

S00B

S00C

S00D

S00E

S00F

Name

T1/T1S operation mode

CPU error (down)

I/O error (down)

Program error (down)

EEPROM alarm (alarm)

Fixed-time scan time-over

(alarm)

−

Clock/calendar error

(alarm)

−

TL-F10 error (alarm)

−

Retentive data invalid

(alarm)

0: Initialization

1: HALT mode

2: RUN mode

4: HOLD mode

6: ERROR mode

3: RUN-F mode

ON at error state (related to SW01)

ON at error state (related to SW02)

ON at error state (related to SW03)

ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times

ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting time as fixed-time scan

Reserved

ON when clock/calendar data is illegal

Reserved

Function

ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs

Reserved

ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these devices cannot be used in the user program.

(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode.

These devices can be used in the user program.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

S013

S014

S015

S016

S017

S018

S019

S01A

S01B

S01C

S01D

S01E

S01F

S020

S021

S022

S023

S024

S025

S026

S027

S028

S029

S02A

S02B

S02C

S02D

S02E

S02F

Device/ register

S010

S011

S012

Name

System ROM error (down) ON at error state

System RAM error (down) ON at error state

Program memory error

(down)

ON at error state

EEPROM error (down)

−

Watchdog timer error

(down)

−

I/O mismatch (down)

−

ON at error state

Reserved

ON at error state

Reserved

ON at error state

Reserved

Function

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these devices cannot be used in the user program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

S03B

S03C

S03D

S03E

S03F

S040

S041

S042

S043

S044

S045

S046

S047

S048

S049

Device/ register

S030

S031

S032

S033

S034

S035

S036

S037

S038

S039

S03A

S04A

S04B

S04C

S04D

S04E

S04F

Name

Program error

Scan time over (down)

−

Timing relay 0.1 s

Timing relay 0.2 s

Timing relay 0.4 s

Timing relay 0.8 s

Timing relay 1.0 s

Timing relay 2.0 s

Timing relay 4.0 s

Timing relay 8.0 s

−

Always OFF

Always ON

Function

ON at error state (related to SW06)

ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms

Reserved

OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval)

OFF 0.1 s / ON 0.1 s (0.2 s interval)

OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval)

OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval)

OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval)

OFF 1.0 s / ON 1.0 s (2.0 s interval)

OFF 2.0 s / ON 2.0 s (4.0 s interval)

OFF 4.0 s / ON 4.0 s (8.0 s interval)

Reserved

Always OFF

Always ON

All OFF at the beginning of

RUN mode

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these devices cannot be used in the user program.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

S05A

S05B

S05C

S05D

S05E

S05F

S060

S061

S062

S063

S064

S052

S053

S054

S055

S056

S057

S058

S059

Device/ register

S050

S051

S065

S066

S067

S068

S069

S06A

S06B

S06C

S06D

S06E

S06F

Name Function

CF (carry flag) Used for instructions which manipulate carry

ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred

(related to alarm flags of SW06)

−

Reserved

Illegal instruction (down) ON when illegal instruction is detected

−

Reserved

Boundary error (alarm) ON when illegal address is designated by indirect addressing (operation continued)

−

Division error (alarm)

Reserved

ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation continued)

BCD data error (alarm)

Table operation error

(alarm)

Encode error (alarm)

ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD operation instructions (operation continued)

ON when table size error has detected in table operation instructions (operation continued) (T1S only)

ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation continued)

−

Reserved

NOTE

(1) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these devices cannot be used in the user program.

(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

SW29

SW30

SW31

SW32

SW33

SW34

SW35

SW36

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

SW19

SW20

SW21

SW22

SW23

SW24

Device/ register

SW07

SW08

SW09

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

Name Function

Clock/calendar (Year)

Clock/calendar (Month)

Clock/calendar (Day)

Lower 2 digits of the calendar year

(01, 02, ... )

Month (01, 02, ... 12)

Day (01, 02, ... 31)

Clock/calendar (Hour) Hour (00, 01, ... 59)

Clock/calendar (Minute) Minute (00, 01, ... 59)

Clock/calendar (Second) Second (00, 01, ... 59)

They are stored in the lower 8 bits by

BCD code

Clock/calendar (Week) Day of the week

(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06)

−

Reserved

Peripheral support priority Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority

Mode of special input functions

Used to select the special input functions

Input filter constant

Preset values for high speed counter

Used to set the input filter constant

Used to set the preset values for high speed counters

SW25

SW26

SW27

SW28

SW37

SW38

Count values for high Present count values of the high speed counters are speed counter

High speed counter control flags

−

Mode of special output stored

Control flags for the high speed counters

Reserved

Special output frequency setting

Used to select the special output functions functions

Special output control flags Control flags for the pulse/PWM output

Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output

PWM output duty setting Pulse duty setting for the PWM output

Analog setting value 1 Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0

Analog setting value 2

−

TL-F10 send data

TL-F10 receive data

Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1

Reserved

TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master)

TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master)

PRG port station address Used to set the programmer port station address

(1 to 32)

PRG port parity Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none,

1=odd)

PRG port response delay Used to set the programmer port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

NOTE

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore these devices cannot be used in the user program.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

S402

S403

S404

S405

S406

S407

S408

S409

S40A

S40B

S40C

S40D

S40E

S40F

S395

S396

S397

S398

S399

S39A

S39B

S39C

S39D

S39E

S39F

S400

S401

Device/ register

S390

S391

S392

S393

S394

Name

Timer interrupt execution status

I/O interrupt #1 execution status

I/O interrupt #2 execution status

I/O interrupt #3 execution status

I/O interrupt #4 execution status

−

HOLD device

−

ON during execution

Function

ON during execution

Reserved

ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also available)

Reserved

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

SW42

SW43

SW44

SW45

SW46

SW47

SW48

SW49

SW50

SW51

SW52

SW53

SW54

Device/ register

SW41

SW55

SW56

SW57

SW58

SW59

SW60

SW61

SW62

SW63

Name Function

Sub-program #1 execution status

−

Basic unit I/O LED display mode

Number of EEPROM write data

RS-485 port operation mode

Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is executed

Reserved

Used to display the selected I/O module status

(0 = Basic unit, 1 to 8 = I/O module slot 0 to 7,

9 and 10 = TOSLINE-F10)

Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048)

Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode

(0 = Computer link, 1 = Data link, 2 = Free ASCII,

3 = Inverter connection)

Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function

RS-485 port response delay

RS-485 port Free ASCII flags

−

Reserved

NOTE

(1) For details of SW54, refer to section 1.5.1.

(2) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2.

(3) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication function manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.2 Index modification

When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly designating the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct addressing’.

As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination with the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is called ‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified using an index register, this is called ‘index modification’.

Example 1)



[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]



Data transfer instruction

Transfer data of RW10 to D1000

Example 2)

I J



[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]



Data transfer instruction (with index modification)

Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J)

(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200)

There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers

(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3 types of index register.

There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These are designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc.



[ 00064 MOV I ]



[ D0035 MOV J ]



(substitutes 64 in index register I)

(substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J)



[ RW20 + 00030

→

K ]



(substitutes the result of addition in index register K)

NOTE

(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers.

(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the combinations J×I and K×J are allowed.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

The followings are examples of index modifications.

RW10

D0201

⋅

D0200

When I = 0, it designates RW10.

When I = 1, it designates RW11.

When I = -1, it designates RW09.

When I = 10, it designates RW20.

When I = -10, it designates RW00.

When J = 0, it designates D0201

⋅

D0200.

When J = 1, it designates D0202

⋅

D0201.

When J = 2, it designates D0203

⋅

D0202.

When J = -1, it designates D0200

⋅

D0199.

When J = -2, it designates D0199

⋅

D0198.

!

CAUTION

Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index modification. The address range is not checked by the T1 -16S.

NOTE

Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if a value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before the index modification.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S enhanced model is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second.

These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format as follows.

SW07

SW08

SW09

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

Function

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Week

Data

1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, 2002 = H0002 ...

Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012

1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031

H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023

H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059

Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006

Program example:

In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm.

(H0018)

Clock/calendar back up:

The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1-16S is off by built-in capacitor and by the optional battery (CR2032) if used. Its buck-up period is as follows.

Environment temperature

Under 30 °C (86 °F)

Over 30 °C (86 °F)

Expected value

Capacitor Battery

2 hours

1 hours

2 year

1 year

Guarantee value

Capacitor Battery

1 hours

30 minutes

1 year

6 months

As shown in the table, it is recommended to use the optional battery when the realtime clock/calendar function is used.

In the T1-16S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by excess power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the clock/calendar is used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user program.

Setting the clock/calendar:

To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the week data is automatically calculated.

(1) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the programming tool.

(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.4 I/O allocation

The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW).

The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers

(Y/YW).

The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus one register number can be assigned for either input or output.

As for the T1-16S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows.

T1-16S

Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007)

Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027)

X000 --- X007 Y020 ---- Y027

Any operations for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1 -16S basic unit is used.

However, if the I/O modules are used with the T1-16S, the I/O allocation operation is necessary. Refer to the separate manual "T1-16S User's Manual - I/O Modules -".

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Internally, the T1-16S has information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This

I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software, i.e. register/device.

The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows.

Unit Slot

I/O type

X+Y 4W

PU slot must be blank

Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02 and YW03 are assigned internally)

Slots 1 to 7 of unit 0 are not used

(must be blank)

These slots are for I/O modules

The T1-16S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0 at unit 0 position when the memory clear is executed for the T1-16S.

When the T1-16S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table should be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation), refer to the programming tool manual.

NOTE

(1) Unit base address setting function is not supported by the T1-16S.

Do not use this function with the T1-16S. It will causes malfunction.

(2) When the TOSLINE-F10 station module FR112M is used, allocate it at the end of the I/O modules.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting

The program capacity of the T1-16S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1-16S’s program capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1-16S’s memory mode.

That is, the T1-16S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode.

In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support functions.

To set the T1-16S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the

System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write command.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.6 User program configuration

A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user program’. The T1-16S has 8 k steps capacity for storing the user program.

A ‘step’ is the minimum unit, which composes an instruction. Number of steps required for one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1.

The figure below shows the T1-16S’s memory configuration.

RAM

System information

4 k or 8 k steps User program

Back-up area by EEPROM

Data registers mentioned in section 5.2

Other registers/ devices

NOTE

For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

System information

System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The following contents are included in the system information.

(1) Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type)

(2) User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used)

(3) Passwords

(4) Retentive register area information

(5) T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps

(6) Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval)

(7) Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication parameters (Enhanced model)

(8) I/O allocation table

(9) Input force table

The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when this information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these are over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

User program

The T1-16S has a capacity of 8 k steps of the user program.

The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram, and is managed by units called blocks in each program types.

User program configuration

(Program types)

Program type internal configuration

(Blocks)

Main program

Block 1

Sub-program #1

Timer interrupt

I/O interrupt #1

I/O interrupt #2

I/O interrupt #3

I/O interrupt #4

Subroutine

Block 2

Block 10

Block N

(N = max. 256)

Block 1

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are explained in the following sections.

The following 8 program types are supported by the T1-16S.

(4) I/O interrupt program #1

(5) I/O interrupt program #2

(6) I/O interrupt program #3

(7) I/O interrupt program #4

(8) Subroutine

The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive.

In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is the total capacity.

6.6.1

Main program

The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan.

1 scan time

Mode I/O Timer Main program Mode I/O Timer

Main program

Time

In the above figure,

Mode means the mode control operation

I/O means the I/O update processing

Timer means the timer up date processing

Main program means the main program execution the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure.

The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction.

Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not be executed.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.6.2

Sub-program #1

If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first scan (before main program execution).

Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers.

The sub-program #1 is called the initial program.

The figure below shows the first scan operation.

RUN mode transition

1st scan 2nd scan

I/O Timer Sub#1 Main program Mode I/O Timer

Main program

Time

The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction.

6.6.3

Timer interrupt program

The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user specified interval, with suspending other operation.

The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)

1 scan 1 scan 1 scan 1 scan

Scan

Timer interrupt

Timer interrupt interval

Time

The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.6.4

I/O interrupt programs

The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation.

The following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S.

(1) I/O interrupt #1

The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3.

(2) I/O interrupt #2

The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to section 8.3 for details.

(3) I/O interrupt #3

The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.4.

(4) I/O interrupt #4

The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section

8.4 for details.

If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including the timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing the other interrupt program execution.

If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as follows.

Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.6.5

Subroutines

In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be programmed.

The T1-16S supports up to 256 subroutines.

The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types

(main program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines.

One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET instruction.

It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available subroutine numbers are 0 to 255.



[ SUBR (000) ]



Subroutine number

The RET instruction has no subroutine number.

The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL instruction has the subroutine number to be called.



[ CALL N.000 ]



Subroutine number

Main program

Execution flow

Subroutine



[ SUBR (000) ]





[ CALL N.000 ]





[ RET ]



NOTE

(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one subroutine in one block is recommended.

(2) From the inside of a subroutine, other subroutines can be called

(nesting). Its allowable level is up to 3 levels.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.7 Programming language

The programming language of the T1-16S is ‘ladder diagram’.

Ladder diagram is a language, which composes program using relay symbols as a base in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to achieve an efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations of relay symbols and function blocks are used.

The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as one network which is connected each other.

Rung number Rung

The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and cannot be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs.

The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines

12 columns.

A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below.

When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON.

Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less.

Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON.

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.8 Program execution sequence

The instructions execution sequence is shown below.

(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block, which contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program).

(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block

(or the END instruction).

(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung.

When there is no vertical connection, they are executed from left to right.

1 2 3 4

When there is an OR connection, the OR logic portion is executed first.

1 2

4 6 7

When there is a branch, they are executed in the order from the upper line to the lower line.

A combination of

@ and

A above.

1 2 3

3 4

The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the specifications of each instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.9 On-line debug support functions

The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1-16S for effective program debugging.

On-line function

Force function

Sampling trace function

Changing timer /counter preset value

Changing constant operand of function instruction

Changing device directly

Program changing in edit mode

EEPROM write command

NOTE

4 k mode

Yes

Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode.

8 k mode

Yes

Force function

Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force.

The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the external input devices (X).

The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the coil circuit execution status.

On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows.

Forced input

X005 x005

Forced coil

Normal

Y023

Forced

Y023

Normal Forced

NOTE

If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force designation, the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM.

Because the force function is debugging function, release all force designation before executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch release command is available when the T1-16S is in HALT mode.

100

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Sampling trace function

The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer

(T-PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register).

The minimum sampling timing is the T1-16S’s scan cycle.

This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting.

Sampling target

T1-16S

Devices (up to 8) and

Registers (up to 3)

Sampling capacity 256 times

The collected data is stored in the T1-16S internal buffer.

The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed.

The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger condition) can be specified by status changing of devices.

For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to the manual for T-PDS.

T-PDS screen example of device timing chart

NOTE

(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type.

(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used.

Basic Hardware and Function

101

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing

The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in online (during RUN) by using the programming tool.

Function instruction constant operand changing

The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by using the programming tool.

Device changing

The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by using the programming tool.

On-line program changing

When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using normal edit mode. (rung by rung)

In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the following instructions.

END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET

NOTE

The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore, when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be overwritten.

On-line EEPROM write

The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode.

In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM.

During this operation, the T1-16S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the time limit per scan, the T1-16S’s control operation is not stopped.

102

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

6. Programming Information

6.10 Password protection

The T1-16S has the password function to protect the user program and data from unauthorized operations.

There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be registered to control the protection levels.

These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered, changed or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary.

The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual for the programming tool.

Protection level 4 (disabled functions)

•

Writing register/device data

•

Writing

•

I/O

Protection level 3 (disabled functions)

•

Reading

•

Program write into EEPROM

Protection level 2 (disabled functions)

• memory

•

Writing/loading

•

T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool)

• passwords

Protection level 1 (disabled functions)

•

None (all functions are available)

Strict

When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1-16S will be started as protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes the protection level to 2.

NOTE

When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password.

Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords.

Basic Hardware and Function

103

104

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 7 Instructions

7.1

List of instructions, 106

7.2

Instruction specifications, 116

Basic Hardware and Function

105

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

7.1 List of instructions

The T1-16S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 97 types of function instructions as listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in detail later.

The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.)

Basic ladder instructions

FUN

Name

No.

−

NO contact

−

NC contact

−

Transitional

Expression

−

Transitional

−

Coil

Forced coil

−

Inverter

−

Invert coil

−

Positive pulse contact

−

Negative pulse contact

−

Positive pulse coil A

−

Negative pulse coil A

−

ON delay timer

−

[ A TON B ]

−

OFF delay timer

−

[ A TOF B ]

−

Single shot timer

−

[ A SS B ]

−

Function

NO (normally open) contact of device A.

NC (normally closed) contact of device A.

Turns ON output for 1 scan when input changes from OFF to ON.

Turns ON output for 1 scan when input changes from ON to OFF.

Relay coil of device A.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

Page

1 1.4 - 3.3 117

1.4 - 3.3 118

3.0

2.3

119

120

121

Forced coil of device A. State of device A is retained regardless of the input state.

Inverts the input state.

Stores the inverse state of input into device A.

Turns ON output for 1 scan when input is ON and device A changes from OFF to ON.

Turns ON output for 1 scan when input is ON and device A changes from ON to OFF.

Turns ON device A for 1 scan when input changes from OFF to ON.

Turns ON device A for 1 scan when input changes from ON to OFF.

Turns ON output when the time specified by A has elapsed after the input came

ON. B is a timer register.

Turns OFF output when the time specified by A has elapsed after the input came

OFF. B is a timer register.

Turns ON output for the time specified by A when the input comes ON. B is a timer register.

2.3

1.4 - 3.3 123

2.3

12.6

12.8

13.0

122

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

106

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Basic ladder instructions (continued)

FUN

Name

No.

−

Counter

−

Master control set

Master control reset

Expression

C CNT Q

E A B

−−

[ MCS ]

[ MCR ]

−

−

Jump control set

−−

[ JCS ]

−

−

Jump control reset

−−

[ JCR ]

−

−

End

−−

[ END ]

−

Function

Counts the number of cycles the count input (C) comes ON while the enable input (E) is

ON, and turns ON output (Q) when the count reaches to the value specified by A. B is a counter register.

Turns OFF power rail between

MCS and MCR when MCS input is OFF.

Jumps from JCS to JCR when

JCS input is ON.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

22.6

3.75

(in a pair)

2.75

(in a pair)

Page

132

133

134

Indicates end of main program or sub-program.

1 1.4

135

Data transfer instructions

FUN

No.

Name Expression

018 Data transfer

−

[ A MOV B ]

−

019 Double-word data transfer

022 Data exchange

024 Table initialize

−

[ A+1

⋅

A DMOV B+1

⋅

B ]

−

020 Invert transfer

−

[ A NOT B ]

−

[ A XCHG B ]

−

[ A TINZ (n) B ]

−

Function

Transfers data of A to B.

Transfers double-word data of A+1

⋅

A to B+1

⋅

Transfers bit-inverted data of

A to B.

Exchanges data of A with B.

Transfers data of A to n registers starting with B.

025 Table transfer

026 Table invert transfer

090 Multiplexer

−

[ A TMOV (n) B ]

−

[ A TNOT (n) B ]

−

[ A MPX (n) B

→

C ]

−

Transfers data of n registers starting with A to n registers starting with B.

Transfers bit-inverted data of

n registers starting with A to

n registers starting with B.

Transfers data from the register specified by B in the table, size n starting with A, to C.

091 Demultiplexer

−

[ A DPX (n) B

→

C ]

−

Transfers data from A to the register specified by B in the table, size n starting with C.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

4.2

7.2

4.6

6.5

70.6

71.5

Page

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

176

177

Basic Hardware and Function

107

7. Instructions

Arithmetic operations

FUN

No.

Name

027 Addition

028 Subtraction

029 Multiplication

030 Division

031 Double-word addition

032 Double-word subtraction

035 Addition with carry

036 Subtraction with carry

039 Unsigned multiplication

040 Unsigned division

041 Unsigned double/single division

043 Increment

−

[ A

∗

Expression

−

[ A + B

→

C ]

−

[ A - B

−

[ A / B

→

C ]

−

C ]

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D+ B+1

⋅

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D- B+1

⋅

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

[ A +C B

→

C ]

−

[ A -C B

→

C ]

−

[ A U

∗

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

[ A U/ B

→

C ]

−

[ A+1

⋅

A DIV B

→

C ]

−

[ +1 A ]

−

044 Decrement

−

[ -1 A ]

−

→

C ]

−

C+1

⋅

Function

Adds data of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Subtracts data of B from A, and stores the result in C.

Multiplies data of A and B, and stores the result in double-length register C+1

⋅

Divides data of A by B, and stores the quotient in C and the reminder in C+1.

Adds data of A+1

⋅

A and

B+1

⋅

B, and stores the result in C+1

⋅

Subtracts data of B+1

⋅

B from

A+1

⋅

A, and stores the result in C+1

⋅

Adds data of A, B and the carry, and stores the result in

C. The carry flag changes according to the result.

Subtracts data of B and the carry from A, and stores the result in C. The carry flag changes according to the result.

Multiplies data of A and B, and stores the result in double-length register C+1

⋅

(Unsigned integer operation)

Divides data of A by B, and stores the quotient in C and the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

Divides data of A+1

⋅

A by B, and stores the quotient in C and the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

Increments data of A by 1.

Decrements data of A by 1.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

6.5

8.8

9.7

11.6

11.7

9.7

15.3

4.6

Page

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

6F3B0253

108

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Logical operations

FUN

No.

Name Expression Function

048 AND

050 OR

−

[ A AND B

→

C ]

−

[ A OR B

→

C ]

−

Finds logical AND of A and B, and stores it in C.

Finds logical OR of A and B, and stores it in C.

052 Exclusive OR

−

[ A EOR B

→

C ]

−

Finds logical exclusive OR of A and B, and stores it in C.

064 Bit test

−

[ A TEST B ]

−

Turns ON output if logical AND of A and B is not 0.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

5.7

5.0

Page

156

157

158

163

Shift operations

FUN

Name Expression

No.

068

1 bit shift right

−

[ SHR1 A ]

−

Function

Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right

(LSB direction). The carry flag changes according to the result.

069 1 bit shift left

−

[ SHL1 A ]

−

Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left

(MSB direction). The carry flag changes according to the result.

070 n bit shift right

−

[ A SHR n

→

B ]

−

Shifts data of A n bits to the right (LSB direction) and stores the result in B. The carry flag changes according to the result.

071 n bit shift left

−

[ A SHL n

→

B ]

−

Shifts data of A n bits to the left

(MSB direction) and stores the result in B. The carry flag changes according to the result.

074 Shift register D SR Q

S (n)

E A

075

Bi-directional shift register

D DSR Q

S (n)

L A

When shift input (S) comes ON, shifts the data of specified shift register 1 bit to the left, and stores data input (D) state into

A. This operation is enabled while enable input (E) is ON.

The carry flag changes according to the result.

Shift register: n devices starting with device A.

When shift input (S) comes ON, shifts the data of specified shift register 1 bit to the left or to the right depending on direction input (L). This operation is enabled while enable input (E) is

ON. The carry flag changes according to the result.

Shift register: n devices starting with device A.

Direction: Left when L is ON, right when L is OFF

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

6.8

65.9 -

76.2

69.0 -

79.3

Page

164

165

10.2

166

10.2

167

168

170

Basic Hardware and Function

109

7. Instructions

Rotate operations

FUN

No.

Name

078 1 bit rotate right

079 1 bit rotate left

−

[ RTR1 A ]

−

Expression

[ RTL1 A ]

−

080 n bit rotate right

−

[ A RTR n

→

B ]

−

081 n bit rotate left

−

[ A RTL n

→

B ]

−

Function

Rotates data of A 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The carry flag changes according to the result.

Rotates data of A 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The carry flag changes according to the result.

Rotates data of A n bits to the right (LSB direction) and stores the result in B. The carry flag changes according to the result.

Rotates data of A n bits to the left (MSB direction) and stores the result in B. The carry flag changes according to the result.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

6.8

10.2

Page

172

173

174

175

6F3B0253

Compare instructions

FUN

No.

Name Expression

096 Greater than

−

[ A > B ]

−

097 Greater than or equal

−

[ A >= B ]

−

098 Equal

−

[ A = B ]

−

099 Not equal

−

[ A <> B ]

−

100 Less than

−

[ A < B ]

−

101 Less than or

−

[ A <= B ]

− equal

102 Double-word greater than

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D> B+1

⋅

B ]

−

103 Double-word greater than or

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D>= B+1

⋅

B ]

− equal

104 Double-word equal

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D= B+1

⋅

B ]

−

105 Double-word not equal

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D<> B+1

⋅

B ]

−

106 Double-word less than

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D< B+1

⋅

B ]

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D<= B+1

⋅

B ]

−

107 Double-word less than or equal

Function

Turns ON output if A

≥

Turns ON output if A

≠

Turns ON output if A

≤

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

≥

B+1

⋅

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

≠

B+1

⋅

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Turns ON output if A+1

⋅

≤

B+1

⋅

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

6.1

5.3

5.0

6.1

5.3

Page

178

179

180

181

182

183

3 6.1

184

5.3

5.0

6.1

5.3

185

186

187

188

189

110

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Compare instructions (continued)

FUN

No.

Name

108 Unsigned greater than

109 Unsigned greater than or equal

110 Unsigned equal

111 Unsigned not equal

112 Unsigned less than

113 Unsigned less than or equal

Expression

−

[ A U> B ]

−

[ A U>= B ]

−

[ A U= B ]

−

[ A U<> B ]

−

[ A U< B ]

−

[ A U<= B ]

−

Function

Turns ON output if A

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A

≥

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A

≠

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A

(Unsigned integer compare)

Turns ON output if A

≤

(Unsigned integer compare)

Special data processing

FUN

No.

Name

114 Device/register set

Expression

−

[ SET A ]

−

115 Device/register reset

−

[ RST A ]

−

118 Set carry

119 Reset carry

120 Encode

121 Decode

122 Bit count

147 Flip-flop

149 Up-down counter

−

[ SETC ]

−

[ RSTC ]

−

[ A ENC (n) B ]

−

[ A DEC (n) B ]

−

[ A BC B ]

−

S F/F Q

R A

U U/D Q

E A

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

Page

190

191

192

193

194

195

Function

If A is a device:

Sets device A to ON.

If A is a register:

Stores HFFFF in register A.

If A is a device:

Resets device A to OFF.

If A is a register:

Stores 0 in register A.

Sets the carry flag to ON.

Resets the carry flag to OFF.

Finds the uppermost ON bit position in the bit file of size 2 n bits starting with register A, and stores it in B.

In the bit file of size 2 n

bits starting with register B, sets ON the bit position indicated by lower n bits of A, and resets

OFF all other bits.

Counts the number of ON bits of A and stores it in B.

Sets ON device A when set input (S) is ON, and resets OFF device A when reset input (R) is

ON.

(Reset takes priority)

While enable input (E) is ON, counts up or down the number of cycles the count input (C) comes ON, depending on the up/down select input (U).

Up when U is ON, down when U is OFF.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

4.2

57.0 -

141.4

69.5 -

99.1

26.7

30.1

Page

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

215

216

Basic Hardware and Function

111

7. Instructions

Program control instructions

FUN

No.

Name Expression

128 Subroutine call

−

[ CALL N. n ]

−

129 Subroutine

−−

[ RET ]

− return

132 FOR

−

[ FOR n ]

−

133 NEXT

−

[ NEXT ]

−

137 Subroutine entry

−

[ SUBR (n) ]

−−

140 Enable interrupt

−

[ EI ]

−

141 Disable

−

[ DI ]

− interrupt

142 Interrupt return

−−

[ IRET ]

−

143 Watchdog timer reset

144 Step sequence initialize

−

[ WDT n ]

−

[ STIZ (n) A ]

−

145 Step sequence input

−

[ STIN A ]

−

146 Step sequence output

−

[ STOT A ]

−

Function

Calls the subroutine number n.

Indicates the end of a subroutine.

When the input of FOR is ON, executes the segment from

FOR to NEXT the number of times specified by n.

Indicates the start of the subroutine number n.

Enables execution of interrupt program.

Disables execution of interrupt program.

Indicates the end of an interrupt program.

Extends the scan time over detection time.

Resets OFF the n devices stating with

A, and sets ON A.

Turns ON output if input is ON and A is

ON.

These configure a series of step sequence

When input is ON, resets OFF the devices of STIN on the same rung, and sets ON A.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

21.0

(in a pair)

22.0

(in a

205 pair) 206 included in CALL

27.6

(in a

203

204

207

208 pair) 209

1.4

16.1

59.9 -

65.0

27.0

27.0 -

119.0

Page

210

211

212

213

214

6F3B0253

RAS

FUN

No.

Name

154 Set calendar

155 Calendar operation

Expression

−

[ A CLND ]

−

[ A CLDS B ]

−

Function

Sets 6 registers data starting with A into clock/calendar.

Calculates difference between present date & time and past date & time stored in 6 registers starting with A, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

Page

217

218

112

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Functions

FUN

No.

056 Moving average

061 Digital filter

156 Pre-derivative real PID

160 Upper limit

161 Lower limit

162 Maximum value

Name

163 Minimum value

164 Average value

165 Function generator

−

Expression

−

[ A MAVE (n) B

→

C ]

−

[ A DFL B

→

C ]

−

[ A PID3 B

→

C ]

−

[ A UL B

→

C ]

−

[ A LL B

→

C ]

−

[ A MAX (n) B ]

−

[ A MIN (n) B ]

[ A AVE (n) B ]

−

[ A FG (n) B

→

C ]

−

Function

Calculates the average value of latest n scan values of A, and stores the result in C.

Filters the value of A by filter constant specified by B, and stores the result in C.

Performs PID control. (prederivative real PID algorithm)

Process value (PV): A

Set value (SV): A+1

PID parameters: B and after

Manipulation value (MV): C

Upper limits the value of A by B, and stores the result in

Lower limits the value of A by B, and stores the result in

Finds the maximum value of

n registers data starting with

A, and stores the value in C and the pointer in C+1.

Finds the minimum value of

n registers data starting with

A, and stores the value in C and the pointer in C+1.

Calculates the average value of n registers data starting with A, and stores the result in C.

Finds f(x) for given x=A, and stores it in C. The function f(x) is defined by parameters stored in a table 2

registers starting with B.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

85.0 -

428.0

77.7 -

142.1

Page

159

160

219

224

225

226

227

228

229

Basic Hardware and Function

113

7. Instructions

Conversion instructions

FUN

No.

Name

062 Hex to ASCII conversion

063 ASCII to Hex conversion

180 Absolute value

182 2’s complement

183 Double-word

2’s complement

185 7-segment decode

186 ASCII conversion

188 Binary conversion

190 BCD conversion

−

[ A HTOA (n) B ]

−

[ A ATOH (n) B ]

−

Expression

[ A ABS B ]

−

[ A NEG B ]

−

Function

Converts the hexadecimal data of n words stating with

A into ASCII characters, and stores them in nx2 registers starting with B.

Converts the ASCII characters stored in n registers stating with A into hexadecimal data, and stores them in n/2 registers starting with B.

Stores the absolute value of

A in B.

Stores the 2’s complement value of A in B.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

5.0

4.6

Page

161

162

231

232

−

[ A+1

⋅

A DNEG B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Stores the 2’s complement value of A+1

⋅

A in B+1

⋅

−

[ A 7SEG B ]

−

[ A ASC B ]

−

[ A BIN B ]

−

[ A BCD B ]

−

3 4.6

233

Converts lower 4 bits of A into 7-segment code, and stores it in B.

Converts the alphanumerics

(max. 16 characters) of A into ASCII codes, and stores them in registers starting with B.

Converts the BCD data in A into binary data, and stores it in B.

Converts the binary data in A into BCD data, and stores it in B.

3 - 10

43.9

29.8 -

49.6

65.5

55.6

234

236

237

238

6F3B0253

114

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Special I/O instructions

FUN

No.

Name

235 Direct I/O

Expression

−

[ I/O (n) A ]

−

236 Expanded data transfer

−

[ A XFER B

→

C ]

−

Function

Performs the immediate block I/O transfer of n registers starting with A.

Writes data into the built-in

EEPROM, or reads data from the EEPROM. The transfer source and destination are indirectly designated by A and C. The transfer register size is designated by B.

Steps

Speed

(

µ s)

20.7 +

21.3

Available Page

√ *1

257

54.0

1w read

7130

16w write

√

259

*1: Direct I/O instruction is effective only for the basic unit inputs/outputs.

*2: The expanded data transfer (XFER) instruction supports some special functions. It also supports the communication function. The execution speed shown in the above table is for the EEPROM read/write function. When the Inverter connection mode is selected, the execution speed of this instruction is typically 150

µ s (max.

500

µ s).

NOTE

The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the execution speed column show the execution time without index modification.

If index modification is used, approx. 20

µ s is added per one indexed operand.

Basic Hardware and Function

115

7. Instructions

7.2 Instruction specifications

The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each instruction. On each page, the following items are explained.

6F3B0253

Expression

Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters.

Function

Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the

Expression box.

Execution condition

Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status.

Operand

Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (

√

), it means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to

2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available.

Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for each operand.

Example

Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example.

Note

Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction.

116

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

NO contact

Expression

Input Output

Function

NO (normally open) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

ON When device A is OFF

When device A is ON

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON.

X000

R001

Y022

Basic Hardware and Function

117

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

NC contact

Expression

Input Output

Function

NC (normally closed) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

ON When device A is OFF

When device A is ON

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF.

X000

R001

Y022

118

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Rising edge)

Expression

Input Output

Function

When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Regardless of the input state at last scan

ON When the input state at last scan is OFF

When the input state at last scan is ON

Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON.

X000

Y022

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total)

•

In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

Basic Hardware and Function

119

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Falling edge)

Expression

Input Output

Function

When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF When the input state at last scan is OFF

When the input state at last scan is ON

ON Regardless of the input state at last scan

Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

6F3B0253

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF.

X000

Y022

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total)

•

In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

120

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

( )

Coil

Expression

Input ( )

Function

Relay coil of device A.

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF Sets device A to OFF

Operation

ON Sets device A to ON

Operand

Name

A Device

Example

Output

−

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

Basic Hardware and Function

121

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Expression

Input

Forced coil

Function

Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No operation

ON No operation

Operation Output

−

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Example

Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state.

X000

Y025

Set force Reset force Set force Reset force

Note

•

The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF by the programming tool.

122

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

I Inverter

Expression

Input I Output

Function

When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned

OFF.

This instruction inverts the link state.

Execution condition

Input

OFF Inverts the input state

Operation

ON Inverts the input state

Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y022

Basic Hardware and Function

123

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

( I )

Invert coil

Expression

Input ( I )

Function

When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to

OFF. This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the device A.

Execution condition

Input

OFF Sets device A to ON

ON Sets device A to OFF

Operation Output

−

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Example

Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

124

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Positive pulse contact

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at this scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

ON State of device A is OFF

State of device A is ON A is OFF at last scan

A is ON at last scan

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

Basic Hardware and Function

125

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Negative pulse contact

Expression

Input

Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at this scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Regardless of the state of device A

ON State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan

A is ON at last scan

State of device A is ON

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

126

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

( P )

Positive pulse coil

Expression

Input (

)

Function

When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF Sets device A to OFF

Operation

ON When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF

Output

−

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON.

X000

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

Basic Hardware and Function

127

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

( N )

Negative pulse coil

Expression

Input (

)

Function

When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON

ON Sets device A to OFF

Output

−

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF.

X000

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

•

The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(

P N (P) (N) total)

128

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

TON ON delay timer

Expression

Input



[ A TON B ]



Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to B is turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped)

When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device are turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No operation (timer is not updating)

Elapsed time

preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time

≥

preset time (timer is not updating)

Operand

Name

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Output

OFF

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

0 - 32767

√

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON.

X000

Preset value

T000

T.000

Y021

Preset time (2s) Less than preset time

Note

•

Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

•

Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

•

Multiple instructions

SS) with the same timer register are not allowed.

Basic Hardware and Function

129

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

TOF OFF delay timer

Expression

Input



[ A TOF B ]



Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF

Elapsed time

preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time

≥

preset time (timer is not updating)

ON No operation (timer is not updating)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

0 - 32767

√

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF.

X000

Preset value

T002

T.002

Y021

Note

•

Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

Preset time (1 s) Less than preset time

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

•

Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

•

Multiple instructions

SS) with the same timer register are not allowed.

130

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

SS Single shot timer

Expression

Input



[ A SS B ]



Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B.

When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF

Elapsed time

preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time

≥

preset time (timer is not updating)

Elapsed time

preset time (timer is updating)

Elapsed time

≥

preset time (timer is not updating)

Operand

Name

A Preset time

B Elapsed time

Output

OFF

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

0 - 32767

√

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON.

X000

Preset value

T003

T.003

Y021

Preset time (1 s) Preset time (1 s)

Note

•

Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1:

T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

•

Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

•

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s) timer

SS) with the same timer register are not allowed.

Basic Hardware and Function

131

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

CNT Counter

Expression

Count input

CNT

Output

Enable input

A B

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from

OFF to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the set value A, the output and the counter device corresponding to B are turned ON. When the enable input comes OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 65535.

Execution condition

Enable input

Operation

OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0)

Count value (B)

set value (A)

Count value (B)

≥

set value (A)

Operand

Name

A Set value

B Count value

Output

OFF

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

0 - 65535

√

Example

X001

X002

C010

C.010

Y021

132

T1-16S User’s Manual

Note

•

No transitional contact is required for the count input. The count input rising edge is detected by this instruction.

•

For the count input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON

= S04F, etc.) just before the input.

Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

•

Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

MCS

MCR

Master control set / reset

Expression

Input [ MCS ]

[ MCR ]

Function

When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state of left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF.

Execution condition

MCS input

Operation

OFF Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR

ON Ordinary operation

Output

−

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and

X002.

Equivalent circuit

X000

X001 Y021

Note

•

MCS and MCR must be used as a pair.

• is

X002 Y022

Basic Hardware and Function

133

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

JCS

JCR

Jump control set / reset

Expression

Input [ JCS ]

[ JCR ]

Function

When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When the JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed.

Execution condition

JCS input

OFF Ordinary operation

ON Skips until JCR

Operation Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state regardless of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state.

Note

•

JCS and JCR must be used as a pair.

• is

134

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

END End

Expression

[ END ]

Function

Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Note

•

For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program.

•

Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used steps.

Basic Hardware and Function

135

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 018 MOV Data transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A MOV B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√ √

√

Example 1 (constant to register)

When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON.

Example 2 (register to register)

When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30 is 500, the data 500 is stored in RW45.

Example 3 (index modification)

When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and the data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10.

136

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 019 DMOV Double-word data transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A MOV B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1

⋅

A is stored in double-word register

B+1

⋅

B. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√ √

√

Example

When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is stored in RW17

⋅

RW16 and the output is turned ON. If D0101

⋅

D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17

⋅

RW16.

Basic Hardware and Function

137

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 020 NOT Invert transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A NOT B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√ √

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned

ON. If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RW30 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

4 3 1 2

Bit-invert

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D0200 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

B C D E

138

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 022 XCHG Data exchange

Expression

Input

−

[ A XCHG B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Operation data

B Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is

23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows.

RW23 23456

D0100 291

Before operation

RW23

D0100

291

23456

After operation

Basic Hardware and Function

139

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 024 TINZ Table initialize

Expression

Input

−

[ A TINZ (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B.

The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

n Table size

B Start of destination

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 1024

When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to

D0299) and the output is turned ON.

Constant 0 D0200

D0201

D0202

0 100 registers

D0299 0

140

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 025 TMOV Table transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A TMOV (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of source

n Table size

B Start of destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 1024

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to

D1009, and the output is turned ON.

D0500

D0501

D0502

1111

2222

3333 Block transfer

D1000

D1001

D1002

1111

2222

3333 10 registers

D0509 12345 D1009 12345

Note

•

The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

Basic Hardware and Function

141

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 026 TNOT Table invert transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A TNOT (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of source

n Table size

B Start of destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 1024

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to

D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON.

D0600

D0601

D0602

D0603

D0604

H00FF

H0000

H1234

H5555

H89AB

Bit-invert and transfer

D0865

D0866

D0869

HFF00

HFFFF

D0867 HEDCB

D0868 HAAAA

H7654

5 registers

Note

•

The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

142

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 027 +

Expression

Input

−

[ A + B

→

C ]

−

Output

Addition

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C.

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution (normal)

Operation

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is stored in D0110.

If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0100 12345

+

D0110 13345 R010 is OFF

Constant 1000

If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in

D0110, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100 32700

+

Overflow

D0110 32767 R010 is ON

Constant 1000

Basic Hardware and Function

143

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 028

−

Expression

Input

−

[ A

−

→

C ]

−

Output

Subtraction

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution (normal)

Operation

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result is stored in RW50.

If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0200 15000

−

RW50 12500 R010 is OFF

Constant 2500

If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100 -31000

−

Underflow

RW50 -32768 R010 is ON

Constant 2500

144

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 029

∗

Multiplication

Expression

Input

−

[ A

∗

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in double-length register C+1

⋅

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Multiplicand

B Multiplier

C Product

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is stored in double-length register D0101

⋅

D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in

D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in

D0101

⋅

D0100.

D0050 1500

D0101

⋅

D0100 30000

RW05 20

D0101 H0000

D0100 H7530

(upper 16-bit)

(lower 16-bit)

Basic Hardware and Function

145

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 030 /

Expression

Input

−

[ A / B

→

C ]

−

Output

Division

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B

≠

No execution (B

Operand

Name

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28.

If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored in RW28.

RW22 2894

Constant 325

RW27

RW28

294

(quotient)

(remainder)

Note

•

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g.

[ RST S051 ]

•

If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

•

If A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in

C+1.

146

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 031 D+ Double-word addition

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D+ B+1

⋅

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are added, and the result is stored in C+1

⋅

C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1

⋅

C, and the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1

⋅

C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution (normal)

Operation

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0011

⋅

D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the result is stored in D0101

⋅

D0100.

If the data of D0011

⋅

D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101

⋅

D0100, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0011

⋅

D0010 300000

+

D0101

⋅

D0100 400000 R010 is OFF

Constant 100000

Basic Hardware and Function

147

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 032

D

−

Double-word subtraction

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

−

B+1

⋅

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1

⋅

B is subtracted from A+1

⋅

A, and the result is stored in C+1

⋅

C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1

⋅

C, and the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1

⋅

C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Execution (normal)

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25

⋅

RW24 is subtracted from the double-word data of D0101

⋅

D0100, and the result is stored in D0103

⋅

D0102.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25

⋅

RW24 is 80000, the result

1500000 is stored in D0103

⋅

D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0101

⋅

D0100 1580000

RW25

⋅

RW24 80000

−

D0103

⋅

D0102 1500000 R010 is OFF

148

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 035 +C Addition with carry

Expression

Input

−

[ A +C B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution Normal No carry

Carry occurred

Overflow / No carry underflow Carry occurred

Output

OFF

−

OFF Reset

OFF Set

Reset

Set

Operand

Name

A Augend

B Addend

C Sum

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101

⋅

D0100 and RW21

⋅

RW20 are added, and the result is stored in D0201

⋅

D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry flag before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 12345678 and RW21

⋅

RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is stored in D0201

⋅

D0200.

D0101

⋅

D0100 12345678

RW21

⋅

RW20 54322

+

D0201

⋅

D0200 12400000

Basic Hardware and Function

149

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 036

C Subtraction with carry

Expression

Input

−

[ A

C B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Execution Normal No borrow

Borrow occurred

Overflow / No borrow underflow Borrow occurred

Output

OFF

−

OFF Reset

OFF Set

Reset

Set

Operand

Name

A Minuend

B Subtrahend

C Difference

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23

⋅

RW22 is subtracted from the data of D0201

⋅

D0200, and the result is stored in D0211

⋅

D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry flag before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0201

⋅

D0200 is 12345678 and RW23

⋅

RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is stored in D0211

⋅

D0210.

D0201

⋅

D0200 12345678

RW23

⋅

RW22 12340000

D0211

⋅

D0210 5678

150

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 039

U

∗

Unsigned multiplication

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

∗

→

C+1

⋅

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in double-length register C+1

⋅

C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Multiplicand

B Multiplier

C Product

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is stored in double-length register D0101

⋅

D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in

D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in

D0101

⋅

D0100.

D0050 52500

D0101

⋅

D0100 1575000

RW05 30

Note

•

This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

Basic Hardware and Function

151

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 040 U/ Unsigned division

Expression

Input

−

[ A U/ B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1.

The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B

≠

No execution (B

Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Operand

Name

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051.

If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is stored in D0051.

D0030 54321

Constant 300

RW27

RW28

181

(quotient)

(remainder)

Note

•

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g.

−

[ RST S051 ]

−

•

If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

•

This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

152

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 041 DIV Unsigned double/single division

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A DIV B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1

⋅

A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data range of B and C is 0 to 65535.

If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in

C+1, and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

Normal execution (B

≠

Overflow (B

≠

No execution (B

Operand

Name

A Dividend

B Divisor

C Quotient

Output ERF

OFF

−

ON Set

OFF Set

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201

⋅

D0200 is divided by the constant data

4000, and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001.

If the data of D0201

⋅

D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder

257 is stored in D1001.

D0201

⋅

D0200 332257

Constant 4000

D1000

D1001

83 (quotient)

257 (remainder)

Note

•

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g.

−

[ RST S051 ]

−

•

This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

Basic Hardware and Function

153

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 043 +1

Expression

Input

−

[ +1 A ]

−

Output

Increment

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution.

D0050

750 + 1

D0050

751

Note

•

There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the execution, it will be -32768 after the execution.

154

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 045

1

Expression

Input

−

[

1 A ]

−

Output

Decrement

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution.

D0050

1022

D0050

1021

Note

•

There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the execution, it will be 32767 after the execution.

Basic Hardware and Function

155

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 048 AND AND

Expression

Input

−

[ A AND B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Source

C AND

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant data HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030.

If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030.

RW12

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

3 4

AND

5 6

Constant 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

F F 0 0

D0030 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 4 0 0

156

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 050 OR OR

Expression

Input

−

[ A OR B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B source

C OR

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the result is stored in D0031.

If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031.

RW13

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

RW20

5 6 7 8

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

4 3 2 1

D0031 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

5 7 7 9

Basic Hardware and Function

157

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 052 EOR Exclusive OR

Expression

Input

−

[ A EOR B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B source

C Exclusive OR

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and the result is stored in D1000.

If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000.

D1000

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

5 6 7

Exclusive OR

D0300 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

4 3 2 1

D1000 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 5 5 9

158

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 056 MAVE Moving average

Expression

Input

−

[ A MAVE (n) B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latest n scan’s register A data, and stores it in C. The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.

The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Input data

n Data size

B Start of table

C Output data

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 64

The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average value of them is calculated and stored in D0010.

D0011 is used as internal work data.

1st scan

2nd scan

3rd scan

4th scan

5th scan

6th scan

7th scan

8th scan

XW04 D0010

1000 200 = (1000) / 5

1005

1009

401 = (1000 + 1005) / 5

603 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5

1012

1007

1004

998

994

805 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5

1006 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5

1007 = (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5

1006 = (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5

1003 = (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5

Basic Hardware and Function

159

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 061 DFL Digital Filter

Expression

Input

−

[ A DFL B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C.

y n

(

1 FL

)

× x n

× y n

−

Here; x n

is input data specified by A

FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999) y n

is output data to be stored in C y n-1

is output data at last scan

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. C+1 is used for internal work data.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to

9999)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Input data

B Filter constant

C Output data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data)

When D0100 value is small

XW04

When D0100 value is large

XW04

D0110

Time Time

160

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 062 HTOA Hex to ASCII conversion

Expression

Input

−

[ A HTOA (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range of n is 1 to 32.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

n Data size

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 32

Example

When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200.

D0100

D0101

D0102

D0103

H0123

H4567

H89AB

HCDEF

Converted

D0220

D0221

D0222

D0223

D0224

D0225

D0226

D0227

F 8 7

“1” (H31) “0” (H30)

“3” (H33) “2” (H32)

“5” (H35) “4” (H34)

“7” (H37) “6” (H36)

“9” (H39) “8” (H38)

“B” (H42) “A” (H41)

“D” (H44) “C” (H43)

“F” (H46) “E” (H45)

Note

•

If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise, boundary error will occur.

Basic Hardware and Function

161

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 063 ATOH ASCII to Hex conversion

Expression

Input

−

[ A ATOH (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost digit of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table is “0” (H30) to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Normal execution

Conversion data error (no execution)

Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Operand

Name

A Source

n Data size

B Destination

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 64

√ √ √ √ √ √

When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted into hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040.

D0300

D0301

D0302

D0303

D0304

D0305

D0306

D0307

F 8 7

“1” (H31) “0” (H30)

“3” (H33) “2” (H32)

“5” (H35) “4” (H34)

“7” (H37) “6” (H36)

“9” (H39) “8” (H38)

“B” (H42) “A” (H41)

“D” (H44) “C” (H43)

“F” (H46) “E” (H45)

Converted

RW040

RW041

RW042

RW043

H0123

H4567

H89AB

HCDEF

Note

•

If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed.

•

n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n.

162

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 064 TEST Bit test

Expression

Input

−

[ A TEST B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets the output to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Execution When the result is not 0

When the result is 0

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Test data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if the result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to

R07B is ON.)

If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON.

RW07

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

4 0

AND

0 8

Constant 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 F F F

Result is not 0

Result 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

R00A comes ON

Basic Hardware and Function

163

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 068 SHR1 1 bit shift right

Expression

Input

−

[ SHR1 A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in the left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

RW15

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

RW15

(Result)

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 R001 is turned ON

164

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 069 SHL1 1 bit shift left

Expression

Input

−

[ SHL1 A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in the right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 RW15

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

RW15 (Result)

R002 is turned ON 0

Basic Hardware and Function

165

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 070 SHR n bit shift right

Expression

Input

−

[ A SHR n

→

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 16

√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

RW18

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20

(Result)

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

0 R001 is turned OFF

166

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 071 SHL n bit shift left

Expression

Input

−

[ A SHL n

→

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 16

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 RW18

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

RW20 (Result)

R002 is turned OFF 0

Basic Hardware and Function

167

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 074 SR Shift register

Expression

Data input

Shift input

−

Output

−

(n)

Enable input

−

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,

1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is stored in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable input

Operation

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table

ON When the shift input is ON

When the shift input is OFF

Shift execution

No execution

Output CF

OFF Reset

Last bit Set or reset state

−

Operand

Name

A Leading device

n Device size

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

Example

32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the leading bit (R100).

The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F).

168

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

CF R11F R11E R11D R11C

1 0 0 1

R103 R102 R101 R100

0 0 1 1

X008

1 0 0 1

R011 is turned OFF

0 1 1 0

Shift result

Note

•

When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.

•

For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input.

( )

(n)

Not allowed

Dummy contact

(n)

( )

Allowed

Basic Hardware and Function

169

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 075 DSR Bi-directional shift register

Expression

Data input

Shift input

−

DSR

−

Output

−

(n)

Enable input

−

Direction input

−

Function

While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with

A, 1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction input (L).

When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction).

When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction).

The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A if left shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable input

Operation

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table

ON S = ON L = ON Shift left execution

L = OFF Shift right execution

S = OFF No execution

Output CF

OFF Reset

Highest bit state Set or reset

Lowest bit state Set or reset

Highest bit state

−

Operand

Name

A Leading device

n Device size

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

Example

170

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled.

•

When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of

X008 is stored in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest bit (R208).

•

When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of

X008 is stored in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest bit (R200).

The figure below shows an operation example.

(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

CF R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

X008

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Shift result

R012 is turned OFF

(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

X008

R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Shift result 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

R012 is turned ON

Note

•

When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.

•

For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

Basic Hardware and Function

171

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 078 RTR1 1 bit rotate right

Expression

Input

−

[ RTR1 A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed out bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

RW15

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

RW15

(Result)

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

R001 is turned ON

172

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 079 RTL1 1 bit rotate left

Expression

Input

−

[ RTL1 A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed out bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Operation data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 RW15

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

RW15 (Result)

R002 is turned ON

Basic Hardware and Function

173

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 080 RTR n bit rotate right

Expression

Input

−

[ A RTR n

→

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored in B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When LSB = 1

When LSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 16

√

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

∗

RW18

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

RW20

(Result)

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

∗

R001 is turned OFF

174

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 081 RTL n bit rotate left

Expression

Input

−

[ A RTL n

→

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored in B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution When MSB = 1

When MSB = 0

Output

OFF

−

Set or reset

Operand

Name

A Source

n Shift bits

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 16

√

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

∗

(MSB) (LSB)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 RW18

1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

RW20 (Result)

∗

R002 is turned OFF

Basic Hardware and Function

175

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 090 MPX Multiplexer

Expression

Input

−

[ A MPX (n) B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting with A, is transferred to C.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Normal execution

Pointer over (no execution)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of table

n Table size

B Pointer

C Destination

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

0 - 63

When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table

D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005.

If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005.

Source table

D0500

D0501

Pointer

Destination

D0005 12345

D0507

D0508

D0509

12345 7

Note

•

If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer is not executed and the output comes ON.

•

The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

176

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 091 DPX Demultiplexer

Expression

Input

−

[ A DPX (n) B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting with C.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Normal execution

Pointer over (no execution)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

n Table size

B Pointer

C Start of table

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 64

0 - 63

When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by

RW30 in the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size).

If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508.

Source

XW04 3210

Destination table

D0500

D0501

Pointer

D0507

D0508

D0509

3210 8

Note

•

If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer is not executed and the output comes ON.

•

The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

Basic Hardware and Function

177

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 096

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Greater than

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≤

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data of D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000

Constant 2500 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -100

≤

Constant 2500 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

178

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 097

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Greater than or equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≥

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000

≥

D0020 3000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -1500

D0020 0 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

179

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 098

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≠

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000

D0030 3000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -1500

≠

D0030 0 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

180

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 099

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Not equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≠

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 10

≠

Constant 0 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0

Constant 0 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

181

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 100

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Less than

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≥

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10 and that of D0040 is 15, the comparison result is true. Consequently,

R020 is turned ON.

D0125 10

D0040 15 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0 and that of D0040 is -50, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0

≥

D0040 0 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

182

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 101

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Less than or equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≤

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data -100, and if the data of D0125 is less than or equal to -100, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is -150, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 -150

Constant -100 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0

≥

Constant -100 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

183

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 102

D

Double-word greater than

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is greater than B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

≤

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 250000

Constant 200000 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 -100

≤

Constant 200000 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

184

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 103

D

Double-word greater than or equal

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is greater than or equal to B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

≥

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the double-word data of D0251

⋅

D0250, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of

D0251

⋅

D0250, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 250000 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 250000

≥

D0251

⋅

D0250 200000

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is -100 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 -100

D0251

⋅

D0250 0 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

185

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 104

D

Double-word equal

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is equal to B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

≠

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the double-word data of D0251

⋅

D0250, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is equal to the data of D0251

⋅

D0250,

R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 250000 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 250000

D0251

⋅

D0250 250000

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is -100 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 -100

≠

D0251

⋅

D0250 0 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

186

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 105

D

Double-word not equal

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is not equal to B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

≠

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the double-word data of D0251

⋅

D0250, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is not equal to the data of

D0251

⋅

D0250, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 250000 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 250000

≠

D0251

⋅

D0250 250000

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is -100 and D0251

⋅

D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 -100

D0251

⋅

D0250 -100 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

187

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 106

D

Double-word less than

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is less than B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

≥

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 250000

Constant 427780 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 430000

≥

Constant 427780 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

188

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 107

D

Double-word less than or equal

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A D

B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1

⋅

A and B+1

⋅

B are compared, and if A+1

⋅

A is less than or equal to B+1

⋅

B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation

A+1

⋅

≤

B+1

⋅

A+1

⋅

B+1

⋅

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is less than or equal to 0, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is -1, R014 is turned ON.

D0101

⋅

D0100 -1

≤

Constant 0 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101

⋅

D0100 is 10000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101

⋅

D0100 10000

Constant 0 R014 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

Basic Hardware and Function

189

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 108

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned greater than

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≤

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the data of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 52000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 52000

Constant 40000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned

OFF.

D0125 21000

≤

Constant 40000 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

190

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 109

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned greater than or equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≥

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 40000 and that of D0020 is 40000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 40000

≥

D0020 40000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 15000 and that of D0020 is 20000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 15000

D0020 20000 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

Basic Hardware and Function

191

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 110

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≠

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000 and that of D0020 is 35000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 35000

D0030 35000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 1500 and that of D0020 is 4000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 1500

≠

D0030 4000 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

192

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 111

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned not equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≠

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 41000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 41000

≠

Constant 0 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0

Constant 0 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

Basic Hardware and Function

193

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 112

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned less than

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≥

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 43000 and that of D0040 is 45000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 43000

D0040 45000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 50000 and that of D0040 is 50000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 50000

≥

D0040 50000 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

194

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 113

U

Expression

Input

−

[ A U

B ]

−

Output

Unsigned less than or equal

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

≤

Operation

Operand

Name

A Compared data

B Reference data

Output

OFF

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 35000, and if the data of D0125 is less than or equal to 35000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 35000

≤

Constant 35000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 38000

Constant 35000 R020 is OFF

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

Basic Hardware and Function

195

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 114 SET

Expression

Input

−

[ SET A ]

−

Output

Device/register set

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the register A if A is a register.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device or register

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example 1 (device set)

When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes

OFF.

Example 2 (register set)

When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.

196

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 115 RST Device/register reset

Expression

Input

−

[ RST A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF if A is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the register A if A is a register.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Device or register

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example 1 (device reset)

When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes

OFF.

Example 2 (register reset)

When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.

Basic Hardware and Function

197

7. Instructions

FUN 118 SETC Set carry

Expression

Input

−

[ SETC ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

−

Set

When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON.

6F3B0253

198

T1-16S User’s Manual

FUN 119 RSTC Reset carry

Expression

Input

−

[ RSTC ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

−

Reset

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF.

Basic Hardware and Function

199

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 120 ENC Encode

Expression

Input

−

[ A ENC (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit table, size 2

bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Normal execution

There is no ON bit (no execution)

Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Operand

Name

A Start of table

n Table size

B Encode result

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 8

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Example

(=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the position is stored in D0010.

The following figure shows an operation example.

RW06

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

RW05

3 2 1 0

0 0 1 0

D0010 26

Note

•

If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

200

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 121 DEC Decode

Expression

Input

−

[ A DEC (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A to ON in the bit table, size 2

bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Decode source

n Table size

B Start of table

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 8

Example

(=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to

ON, and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF.

The following figure shows an operation example.

D0011

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 1 0 0 0

Ignored

Sets ON

H18 (=24)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

RW06 RW05

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0

Basic Hardware and Function

201

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 122 BC

Expression

Input

−

[ A BC B ]

−

Output

Bit count

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Count data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result is stored in D0102.

The following figure shows an operation example.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RW032 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D0102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

The result data (7) is stored in binary

202

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 128 CALL Subroutine call

Expression

Input

−

[ CALL N. n ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine number n.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

n Subroutine number

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

√

(Note)

When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned from the subroutine, the output is turned ON.

Main program

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

•

The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

•

Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

•

In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a subroutine.

•

In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels)

•

The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the same subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program.

Basic Hardware and Function

203

7. Instructions

RET Subroutine return FUN 129

Expression

−−

[ RET ]

−

Function

This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this instruction, it is returned to the original CALL instruction.

Execution condition

Input

Execution

Operation Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

6F3B0253

Main program

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

•

Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

•

The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

•

The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail.

204

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 132 FOR FOR (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input

−

[ FOR n ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times repeatedly in a scan.

When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once)

Execution condition

Input

OFF No repetition

ON Repetition

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

n Repetition times

Example

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

1 - 32767

This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan.

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a scan.

R005

| | [ FOR 30 ]

Executed 30 times in a scan when

R005 is ON.

[ NEXT ]

Basic Hardware and Function

205

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 133 NEXT NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input

−

[ NEXT ]

−

Output

Function

This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop.

If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the next instruction.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Forcibly breaks the repetition

ON Repetition

Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a scan. In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to

D0029 are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer)

Note

•

The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one.

•

Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a

FOR-NEXT loop.

•

The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung.

•

The following connection is not allowed.

| | [ FOR n ]

| |

| | [ NEXT ]

| |

206

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 137 SUBR Subroutine entry

Expression

−

[ SUBR (n) ]

−−

Function

This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine.

Execution condition

Input

Execution

Operation

Operand

Name

n Subroutine number

Output

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

√

(Note)

Example

The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated.

Main program

| | [ CALL N.008 ]

Subroutine

[ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

•

The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

•

Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129).

•

The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

• of subroutine.

•

No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction.

Basic Hardware and Function

207

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 140

Expression

Input

−

[ EI ]

−

Output

EI Enable interrupt

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation, i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables the interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption between each instructions.

Note

•

Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141).

•

If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

•

The EI instruction can be used only in the main program.

208

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 141

Expression

Input

−

[ DI ]

−

Output

DI Disable interrupt

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation, i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000 is OFF.

Note

•

Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140).

•

If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

•

The DI instruction can be used only in the main program.

Basic Hardware and Function

209

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 142

Expression

−−

[ IRET ]

−

IRET Interrupt return

Function

This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine).

Execution condition

Input

Execution

Operation Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

An interrupt program

(Timer interrupt,

I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4)

Note

•

The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program.

•

There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program.

210

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 143 WDT Watchdog timer reset

Expression

Input

−

[ WDT n ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms.

Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction can be used to extend the detection time.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

n Extend time

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

1 - 100

Example

When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms.

0 50 100

Normal detection point Extended point

150 200 250 300 (ms)

Extended by 200 ms

Scan

WDT instruction execution

Note

•

As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the

T1/T1S, it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n.

Basic Hardware and Function

211

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 144 STIZ Step sequence initialize

Expression

Input

−

[ STIZ (n) A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON.

This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to describe a sequential operation.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No execution

ON Execution at the rising edge of the input

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

n Size of step sequence

A Start device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

1 - 64

√

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 to R409) are reset to OFF.

This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400.

R409 R408 R407 R406 R405 R404 R403 R402 R401 R400

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

10 devices starting with R400

Note

•

The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to configure the step sequence.

•

The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON.

212

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 145 STIN Step sequence input

Expression

Input

−

[ STIN A ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON When A is ON

When A is OFF

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Step device

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√

Constant Index

The following sequential operation is performed.

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401 to R409) are reset to OFF.

When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON.

When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON.

R020

X004

X005

R022

R400

R401

R402

Basic Hardware and Function

213

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 146 STOT Step sequence output

Expression

Input

−

[ STOT A ]

−

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same rung are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

Operand

Name

A Step device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√

Constant Index

Example

See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction.

Note

•

The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence.

•

Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences.

•

Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop or convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung)

•

To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows.

This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only.

[ STIN A ] | |

| |

Not allowed

[ STOT B ]

[ STOT C ]

[ STIN A ]

| |

Available

[ STOT B ]

[ STOT C ]

214

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 147 F/F Flip-flop

Expression

Set input

−

F/F

−

Output

Reset input

−

Function

When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both the set and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF.

The state of the output is the same as the device A.

Execution condition

Set input

OFF

Reset input

Operation

OFF No execution (A remains previous state)

ON Resets A to OFF

OFF Sets A to ON

ON Resets A to OFF

Output

Same as A

Operand

Name

A Device

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √

Constant Index

Example

When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are

ON, R10E is reset to OFF.

An example timing diagram is shown below.

X003

X004

R10E

Note

•

For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

Basic Hardware and Function

215

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 149 U/D Up-down counter

Expression

Direction input

−

U/D

−

Output

Count input

−

Enable input

−

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from

OFF to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction input. The count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535.

•

Up count when the direction input is ON

•

Down count when the direction input is OFF

When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0.

Execution condition

Enable input

Operation

OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0)

ON Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535)

Count value is limit value and count input is ON

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Count value

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√

Constant Index

Example

X005

X006

R010

C005

C.005

216

T1-16S User’s Manual

2 3

Note

•

The transitional contact is required for the count input. Otherwise, counting is executed every scan during X005 is ON in this example.

•

For the direction input and the count input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 154 CLND Set calendar

Expression

Input

−

[ A CLND ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No operation

ON Execution (data is valid))

No execution (data is not valid)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of table

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the output is OFF (R0031 is OFF).

If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0031 comes ON).

D0050

D0051

D0052

D0053

D0054

D0055

H00

8 7

Year

Month

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Allowable data range (2-digit BCD)

H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089)

H01 to H12

H01 to H31

H00 to H23

H00 to H59

Calendar

LSI

Note

•

The day of the week is automatically.

Basic Hardware and Function

217

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 155 CLDS Calendar operation

Expression

Input

−

[ A CLDS B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with

A from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B.

If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No operation

Operation

ON Execution (data is valid))

No execution (data is not valid)

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Subtrahend

B Result

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Example

When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from the current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105.

In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON).

Current date & time

H0098

H0001

H0015

H0017

H0000

H0000 minus

D0050

D0051

D0052

D0053

D0054

D0055

H0097

H0010

H0015

H0030

H0000

0 F 0

D0100 H0000 (Year)

D0101 H0003 (Month)

D0102 H0007 (Day)

D0103 H0001 (Hour)

D0104 H0030 (Minute)

D0105 H0000 (Second)

Note

•

Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A.

•

In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days.

218

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 156 PID3 Pre-derivative real PID

Expression

Input

−

[ A PID3 B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feedback control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features.

•

For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency noise and to expand the stable application range,

•

Controllability algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID.

•

Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction.

•

Digital filter is available for PV.

•

Direct / reverse operation is selectable.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF Initialization

ON Execute PID every setting interval

Output

OFF

ON when execution

Operand

Name

A Top of input data

B Top of parameter

C Top of output data

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Input data

A Process input value

PVC

A+1 A-mode set value

A+2 C-mode set value

A+3 M-mode MV input

A+4 MV tracking input

A+5 Mode setting

ASV

Control parameter

B Proportional gain

B+1 Integral time

CSV

B+2 Derivative time

MMV

B+3 Dead-band

TMV

B+4 A-mode initial SV

MODE

B+5 Input filter constant

C Manipulation value

C+1 Last error

e n-1

C+2 Last derivative value

C+3 Last PV

PV n-1 n-1

ISV

C+4 Last SV

SV n-1

Output data

C+5 Integral remainder

B+6 ASV differential limit

DSV

C+6 Derivative remainder

A-mode: Auto mode

C-mode: Cascade mode

M-mode: Manual mode

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV

B+8 Initial status

B+9 MV upper limit

B+10 MV lower limit

STS

C+9 Control interval

B+11 MV differential limit

DMV

C+7 Internal MV

C+8 Internal counter

MV n

∆∆∆∆

B+12 Control interval setting

Basic Hardware and Function

219

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Control block diagram

Integral control

ASV

DSV

Differential

Auto mode

SV n

CSV

Cascade mode

PV n

Gap e n

Integral

⋅ s

∆

I n

Proportional

∆

P n

Derivative

⋅ s

η⋅

⋅ s

∆

D n

(

= 0.1)

MV n

∆

MV n

MVS H/L DMV

MVC n

MMV

DMMV

Differential limit

Manual mode

PVC

MVS: Velocity

→

Position

MV n

= MV n-1

± ∆

MV n

H/L: Upper / lower limit

DMV: Differential limit

Integral action control:

When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action is stopped.

Velocity

→

Position conversion:

In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased.

In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased.

→

MV n

→

MV n

= MV

= MV n-1 n-1

∆

Mv n

∆

MV n

Gap (dead-band) operation:

Error e

1+T

⋅ s

Digtal filter

GP (%) GP (%)

SV - PV

Algorithm

Digital filter:

PV n

Here,

)

⋅ + ⋅ n

−

≤

220

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

PID algorithm:

∆

MV n

⋅

MV n

−

(

∆

P n

+ ∆

I n

+ ∆

D n

)

± ∆

MV n

Here,

∆

P n

= e n

− e n

−

1 e n

SV n

−

PV n

(If GP

≠

0, Gap is applied)

∆

I n

= e n

⋅ +

(If T

= 0, then

∆

I n

∆

D n

⋅

( PV n

D n

−

η =

∆

D n

(Fixed)

−

∆ t

PV n

)

D t D n

−

= 0)

Parameter details

Process input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %)

A+1

Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %)

A+2

Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %)

A+3

Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

A+4

MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

A+5

Mode setting MODE

F C 8 4 0

Data range: 0 to 10000

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Tracking designation

0 : No

1 : Yes

B+1

Proportional gain K

Integral time T

(0.00 to 327.67)

(0.000 to 32.767 min.,

∆

Data range: 0 to 32767 n

=0 if T

=0) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+2

Derivative time T

(0.000 to 32.767 min.) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+3

Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %) Data range: 0 to 1000

B+4

Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000

B+5

Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999)

B+6

ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/

∆ t)

Data range: 0 to 999

Data range: 0 to 10000

B+7

MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/

∆ t) Data range: 0 to 10000

Basic Hardware and Function

221

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

B+8

Initial status STS

F C 8 4 0

Initial operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Direct / reverse selection

0 : Direct

1 : Reverse

B+9

MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

B+10

MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

B+11

MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/

∆ t)

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Data range: 0 to 10000

B+12

Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times) Data range: 1 to 32767

Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval

∆ t = n

constant scan interval

(It is treated as n = 1 when n

≤

Manipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)

C+1

Internal

C+9

Data range: -2500 to 12500

Operation

1. When the instruction input is OFF:

Initializes the PID3 instruction.

Operation mode is set as specified by B+8.

Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4.

Manual mode MV is set as current MV.

Internal calculation data is initialized.

MV remains unchanged.

A+5 bit 0, 1

ASV

MMV

←

ISV

←

B+8 bit 0, 1

2. When the instruction input is ON:

Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are available according to the setting of A+5.

•

Auto

This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value.

Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.

Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value

MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV

←

MV)

222

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

•

Manual

In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV.

MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective.

When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV.

•

Cascade

This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value.

Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.

Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV

←

MV)

And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV

←

CSV)

•

This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation ( A+5 bit 2) is ON, tracking input TMV is directly output as MV.

Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective.

When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV.

Note

•

PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program.

•

PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected in the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments.

•

The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation value MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this purpose, the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient.

Basic Hardware and Function

223

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 160 UL Upper limit

Expression

Input

−

[ A UL B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B)

If A

≤

B, then C = A.

If A

B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No operation

Execution: not limited (A

≤

Execution: limited (A

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Operation data

B Upper limit

C Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of

D1200, and the result is stored in RW021.

(RW021)

Upper limit B (D1200)

A (RW018)

When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF.

When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is ON.

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

224

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 161 LL Lower limit

Expression

Input

−

[ A LL B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B)

If A

≥

B, then C = A.

If A

B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input Operation

OFF No operation

Execution: not limited (A

≥

Execution: limited (A

Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Operation data

B Lower limit

C Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of

D1220, and the result is stored in RW022.

(RW022)

A (RW019)

Lower limit B (D1220)

When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF.

When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is ON.

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

Basic Hardware and Function

225

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 162 MAX Maximum value

Expression

Input

−

[ A MAX (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of size n words starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of the maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

Example

When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10 words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501.

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

200

-300

20000

-30

Pointer

D0500

D0501

20000 (Maximum value)

7 (Pointer)

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

•

If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

•

If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

226

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 163 MIN

Expression

Input

−

[ A MIN (n) B ]

−

Output

Minimum value

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of size n words starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of the minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

Example

When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10 words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511.

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

200

-300

20000

-30

Pointer

D0510

D0511

-1000 (Minimum value)

2 (Pointer)

Note

•

This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

•

If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

•

If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

Basic Hardware and Function

227

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 164 AVE Average value

Expression

Input

−

[ A AVE (n) B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in the n registers starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Start of table

n Table size

B Result

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

1 - 64

Example

When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209

(10 words), and the average value is stored in D0520.

D0200

D0201

D0202

D0203

D0204

D0205

D0206

D0207

D0208

D0209

100

10000

-1000

200

-300

20000

-30

D0520 2900 (Average value)

228

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 165 FG Function generator

Expression

Input

−

[ A FG (n) B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value

f(x)

for A as

, and stores it in C. The function

f(x)

is defined by the parameters stored in 2

n registers starting with B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Input value

n Parameter size

B Start of parameters

C Function value

f(x)

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √

√

√ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

1 - 32

Example

When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value

f(x)

for

= XW004, and stores the result in D0100.

The function

f(x)

is defined by 2

4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example, these parameters are set at the first scan.

Basic Hardware and Function

229

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Parameter table

4 registers for

parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding

f(x)

parameters

y = f(x) y

1800

)

D0600

D0601

D0602

D0603

D0604

D0605

D0606

D0607

-2000

-100

100

2000

-1800

-300

300

1800

2000

)

300

-100

)

100

300

1800

2000 x

The FG instruction interpolators

f(x)

value for

based on the n parameters of (

x i

,y i

For example, if XW04 is 1500 (

x = 1500

), the result 1405 (

f(x) = 1405

) is stored in D0100.

2000

1405 y

1800

300

-100

100

300

1500

2000 x

1800

Note

•

The order of the

parameters should be

≤

...

≤

x i

≤

...

≤

x n

. In the above example, the data of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600

≤

D0601

≤

D0602

≤

D0603.

•

If is smaller than

is given as

f(x)

. In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in

D0100 if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000).

•

If is greater than

x n

y n

is given as

f(x)

. In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in

D0100 if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000).

•

The valid data range is -32768 to 32767.

230

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 180 ABS Absolute value

Expression

Input

−

[ A ABS B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121.

For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121.

D0121

32767

12000

-32767 -12000 0 32767

RW38

Note

•

The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B.

Basic Hardware and Function

231

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 182 NEG 2’s complement

Expression

Input

−

[ A NEG B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122.

For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122.

2’s complement data is calculated as follows.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RW39 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 (4660)

Bit inverse

1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 (-4661)

+ 1

D0122 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 (-4660)

Note

•

The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is stored in B.

232

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 183 DNEG Double-word 2’s complement

Expression

Input

−

[ A+1

⋅

A DNEG B+1

⋅

B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1

⋅

A, and stores it in B+1

⋅

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register

RW41

⋅

RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151

⋅

D0150.

For example, if RW41

⋅

RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored in D0151

⋅

D0150.

Note

•

The data range of A+1

⋅

A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1

⋅

A is -2147483648, the same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1

⋅

Basic Hardware and Function

233

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 185 7SEG 7 segment decode

Expression

Input

−

[ A 7SEG B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data of A into the 7 segment code, and stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Source

B Destination

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

√

Example

When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and the result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10.

For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RW15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 (H0009)

Upper 12 bits are ignored

7 segment decode

RW10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 (H006F)

0 is stored in upper 8 bits

The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page.

234

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Operand A (lower 4 bits)

Hex Binary

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

7 segment LED composition

Operand B (lower 8 bits)

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Display

Basic Hardware and Function

235

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 186 ASC ASCII conversion

Expression

Input

−

[ A ASC B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes, and stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum)

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

A Characters

B Start of destination

Example

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

√

√ √ √ √ √ √

When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207).

High Low

F 8 7 0

D0200 H42 (B) H41 (A)

D0201 H44 (D) H43 (C)

D0202 H46 (F) H45 (E)

D0203 H48 (H) H47 (G)

D0204 H4A (J) H49 (I)

D0205 H4C (L) H4B (K)

D0206 H4E (N) H4D (M)

D0207

Previous data is remained

Note

•

Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above example, 14 characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are stored in 7 registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged.

236

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 188 BIN

Expression

Input

−

[ A BIN B ]

−

Output

Binary conversion

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data of A into binary, and stores in B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Normal execution

BCD data error

Operation Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Operand

Name

A Source (BCD)

B Destination

(Binary)

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

H0000 -

H9999

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Example

When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is stored in D0127.

For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127.

RW28

H1234

BCD to Binary D0127

1234

Note

•

If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Basic Hardware and Function

237

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 190 BCD BCD conversion

Expression

Input

−

[ A BCD B ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Normal execution

Binary data error

Operation Output ERF

OFF

−

OFF Set

Operand

Name

A Source

(Binary)

B Destination

(BCD)

Example

Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

0 - 9999

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in

RW22.

For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22.

D0211

5432

Binary to BCD RW22

H5432

Note

•

If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

238

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 235 I/O

Expression

Input

−

[ I/O (n) A ]

−

Output

Direct I/O

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output

(YW) registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A.

•

For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit

•

For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

ON Execution

Operation Output

OFF

Operand

Name

n Register size

A Start of registers

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

Constant Index

1 - 32

√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated immediately.

XW00

XW01

YW02

YW03

Input circuit

Output circuit

Basic Hardware and Function

239

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Note

•

In the T1-16S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction.

Input on basic unit

X000 - X007

Output on basic unit

Y020 - Y027

I/O module

Not effective

•

The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

240

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer

Expression

Input

−

[ A XFER B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The transfer size (number of words) is designated by B.

The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM)

Data transfer between the following objects are available.

•

CPU register (RW or D)

↔

EEPROM (D register)

•

CPU register (RW or D)

↔

T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Normal execution

When error is occurred (see Note)

Output ERF

OFF

−

ON Set

Operand

Name

A Source parameter

B Transfer size

C Destination parameter

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Parameters

A+1

Source parameter

Type

Leading address

RW register (RAM)

D register (RAM)

D register (EEPROM)

T1S RS-485 port

Transfer size and status

Transfer size

B+1

Status flag for RS-485 port

B+2

(max. 2 words)

Type code

H0003

H0004

H0020

H0030

Leading address

0 to 255

0 to 4095

0 to 2047

0 (fixed)

C+1

Destination parameter

Type

Leading address

Transfer size

1 to 256

1 to 32 (if destination)

1 to 256 (if source)

1 to 256

Basic Hardware and Function

241

7. Instructions

CPU register

↔

built-in EEPROM

In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows.

T1-16S

D0000 Page 1

(32 words)

D0031

D0032 Page 2

(32 words)

D0063

•

Writing data into the EEPROM is available within one page at a time. (max. 32 words)

•

For data reading from the

EEPROM, there is no need to consider the pages.

D2016 Page 64

(32 words)

D2047

Example

6F3B0253

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written into the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025).

D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in

RAM). D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32) and D1004 (16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM).

Note

•

The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by user program.

(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit.

(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.

(3) When the transfer combination is invalid.

•

The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention not to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction)

•

Once writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for the duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing.

•

The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

242

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

CPU register

↔

T1S RS-485 port

<Receiving>

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code) which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length

(in bytes) are stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete.

Example

D0000

D0001

Source designation

H0030

00000

D0002

Transfer size

00256 (fixed)

D0003 Execution status

D0004 Message length

D0005

Destination designation

H0004

D0006 00100

T1S RS-485 port D0100 (CPU register)

When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after.

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error)

H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes)

H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow

H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

Baudrate Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps 15 seconds

4800 bps 7 seconds

9600 bps

19200 bps

3 seconds

1.5 seconds

Message length: 0 .............. No receive message

1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes

Note

•

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is other than 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

Basic Hardware and Function

243

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

<Transmitting>

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution status is stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete.

Example

Source designation

D0010 H00 H04

D0011 00500

D0500 (CPU register)

D0012

Transfer size

00012

D0013 Execution status

Destination designation

D0015 H00 H30

D0016 00000

T1S RS-485 port

When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of

D0500 to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port.

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... During transmitting the message

H0002 ... Communication busy

H0003 ... During the reset operation

H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table)

Baudrate Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps 15 seconds

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

7 seconds

3 seconds

1.5 seconds

Note

•

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

244

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer (Inverter connection mode)

Expression

Input

−

[ A XFER B

→

C ]

−

Output

Function

This function is provided to control Toshiba Inverters VF-A7/G7/S9 connected on the RS-485 line.

When the RS-485 port operation mode is set to the Inverter mode (SW56 = 3), the T1-16S can perform the following functions for up to 63 Inverters.

(1) Cyclically scans the Inverters and sends/receives the following data to/from each Inverter.

•

Send to Inverter: Frequency reference write and Operation command write (Run, Stop, etc.)

•

Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor

(2) Cyclically scans the Inverters and receives the following data from each Inverter.

•

Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor

(3) Sends a specified Read command to a specified Inverter and stores the response data.

(4) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to a specified Inverter.

(5) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to all the connected inverters as broadcast.

Execution condition

Input

OFF No execution

Operation

ON Normal execution

When error is occurred (see Note)

Output ERF

OFF

−

ON Set

Operand

Name

A Data table

B Inverter No.

C RS-485 port

Device Register

X Y R S T.

C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

Constant Index

Parameters

Data table designation

A+1

Leading address

B+1

B+2

Parameter and status

Inverter number

Operation mode

Execution status

B+3

Communication error code

B+4

Inverter communication

B+5

status map

B+6

B+7

(each bit shows each

Inverter status)

C+1

RS-485 port designation

Fixed to H0030

Fixed to 0

Data table designation (A, A+1):

RW register

D register

Type code (A)

H0003

H0004

Leading address (A+1)

0 to 255

0 to 4095

Basic Hardware and Function

245

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Operation mode designation (B+1):

B+1

Operation mode

Data exchange mode

(Mode 0)

Monitor mode

(Mode 1)

Read command mode

(Mode 2)

Write command mode

(Mode 3)

Broadcast mode

(Mode 4)

Description

Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Control & Monitor)

(Inverter command: P+FA01&FA00 and R+FD00&FE07)

Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Monitor only)

(Inverter command: R+FD00&FE07)

Sends a read command to a specified Inverter

(Inverter command: R+ User designation)

Sends a write command to a specified Inverter

(Inverter command: P+ User designation)

Sends a write command to all the connected Inverters as broadcast

(Inverter command: P+ User designation)

Inverter number (B):

For the operation mode 0 and 1:

It specifies the maximum Inverter number. For example, if it is 5, the T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters and repeats. Setting range is 0 to 63.

For the operation mode 2 and 3:

It specifies the target Inverter number for sending commands. Setting range is 0 to 63.

For the operation mode 4:

This setting is ignored. The broadcast address (HFF) is used as Inverter number.

Execution status (B+2):

F E D

B+2

C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Shows the scan count.

→

...

→

32767

→

1 ... )

Comes 1 when the RS-485 port is busy. (No execution)

Communication error code (B+3):

The communication error code responded from the Inverter is shown here. If 2 or more Inverters are error, the smallest Inverter number's error is stored. Refer to Inverter's manual for the error code.

B+3

Meaning

No error (Normal)

Response time-out (No answer)

Others Inverter error response (Refer to Inverter's manual)

Inverter communication status map (B+4 to B+7):

This 4-word table shows the communication status map of each Inverter. (1: Normal / 0: Error or No answer)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

B+4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

B+5

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

B+6

47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

B+7

63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

246

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Data exchange mode (Mode 0) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 0, the Data exchange mode

(mode 0) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following commands to the Inverters starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Scan

#0 Frequency reference write (FA01)

#0 Operation command write (FA00)

#1 Frequency reference write (FA01)

#1 Operation command write (FA00)

#n Frequency reference write (FA01)

#n Operation command write (FA00)

#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

D1000

D1001

Data table designation

2000

RW200

Parameter & status

RW201 0 (mode 0)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

D1010

D1011

RS-485 port

H0030 (fixed)

0 (fixed)

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•

RW200=5

⇒

The max Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters.

•

D1000=4 & D1001=2000

⇒

D2000 is specified as the data table starting address.

Basic Hardware and Function

247

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Data table:

D2000 #0 Operating frequency

D2001 #0 Output terminal status

D2002 #0 Frequency reference

D2003 #0 Operation command

D2004 #1 Operating frequency

D2005 #1 Output terminal status

D2006 #1 Frequency reference

D2007 #1 Operation command

Signal direction

←

Read

←

Read

→

Write

→

Write

←

Read

←

Read

→

Write

→

Write

D2020

D2021

D2022

D2023

#5 Operating frequency

#5 Output terminal status

#5 Frequency reference

#5 Operation command

←

Read

←

Read

→

Write

→

Write

•

The data format for the operating frequency and the frequency reference registers are 0.01 Hz units.

For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000.

•

For the data format of the output terminal status register, refer to the Monitor mode (mode 1).

•

The bit assignment of the operation command register is as follows. For details, refer to your

Inverter manual.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Programmed speed selection

0000 = None

0001 = Speed 1

0010 = Speed 2

1111 = Speed 15

PI operation (0 = Normal / 1 = Off)

DC braking (0 = Off / 1 = On)

Jog operation (0 = off / 1 = On)

F/R selection (0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse)

Run/Stop (0 = Stop / 1 = Run)

Free run (0 = Normal / 1 = Free run)

Emergency stop (0 = Normal / 1 = EMS)

Reset command (0 = Normal / 1 = Reset)

Frequency enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)

Command enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)

Example operation:

To operate the #0 Inverter at 30 Hz forward rotation, write the value 3000 in D2002 and HC400 in

D2003. (HC400 = Bits F, E, A are 1, and others are 0)

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in D2000 and D2001 respectively.

248

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Monitor mode (Mode 1) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 1, the Monitor mode (mode 1) is selected.

In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following Read commands to the Inverters starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Scan

#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The monitor data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

D1000

D1001

Data table designation

100

RW200

Parameter & status

RW201 1 (mode 1)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

D1010

D1011

RS-485 port

H0030 (fixed)

0 (fixed)

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•

RW200=19

⇒

The max Inverter number is 19. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #19 Inverters.

•

D1000=3 & D1001=100

⇒

RW100 is specified as the data table starting address.

Basic Hardware and Function

249

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

Data table:

RW100 #0 Operating frequency

RW101 #0 Output terminal status

RW102

RW103

No use

RW104 #1 Operating frequency

RW105 #1 Output terminal status

RW106

RW107

No use

Signal direction

←

Read

←

Read

←

Read

←

Read

RW176 #19 Operating frequency

RW177 #19 Output terminal status

RW178

RW179

No use

←

Read

•

The data format for the operating frequency register is 0.01 Hz units. For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000.

•

The bit assignment of the output terminal status register is as follows. For details, refer to your

Inverter manual.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OUT1 (f130)

OUT2 (f131)

FL (f132)

R1 (f133)

R2 (f134)

OUT3 (f135)

OUT4 (f136)

ALM0

ALM1

ALM2

ALM3

Example operation:

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in RW100 and RW101 respectively.

If the #0 Inverter is operating at 55 Hz, the data 5500 is stored in RW100. If the OUT2 terminal of the

#0 Inverter is ON, the bit 1 of RW101 (R1011) becomes 1.

250

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Read command mode (Mode 2) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 2, the Read command mode

(mode 2) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Read command to the

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Repeat

Sends the specified command to #n Inverter

Receives the response and stores the data into the register

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command setting register and the response data storing register is indirectly specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000

D1001

Data table designation

3000

RW200

RW201

Parameter & status

2 (mode 2)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

RS-485 port

D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1011 0 (fixed)

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•

RW200=3

⇒

The target Inverter number is 3. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #3 Inverter.

•

D1000=4 & D1001=3000

⇒

D3000 is specified as the command setting register and D3001 is specified as the response data storing register.

Data table:

D3000 Command code

D3001 Response data

Signal direction

←

Read

Example operation:

For example, to read the output current from the #3 Inverter, set the command code HFE03 into

D3000. Then the response data is stored in D3001. If the response data is 1915, it means 19.15 %.

For the command code and the data format of the response, refer to your Inverter manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

251

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Write command mode (Mode 3) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 3, the Write command mode

(mode 3) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to the

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Repeat

Sends the specified command with command data to #n Inverter

Checks the acknowledge

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000

D1001

Data table designation

3010

RW200

RW201

Parameter & status

3 (mode 3)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

RS-485 port

D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1011 0 (fixed)

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•

RW200=5

⇒

The target Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #5 Inverter.

•

D1000=4 & D1001=3010

⇒

D3010 is specified as the command code setting register and D3011 is specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:

D3010 Command code

D3011 Command data

Signal direction

→

Write

Example operation:

For example, to write the acceleration time parameter (10 seconds) to the #5 Inverter, set the command code H0009 into D3010 and the value 100 into D3011.

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

252

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Broadcast mode (Mode 4) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 4, the Broadcast mode (mode 4) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to all the

Inverters as broadcast.

This mode is useful to send Run/Stop command to all the Inverter at the same time.

Repeat

Sends the specified command with command data to all Inverters (broadcast)

Checks the acknowledge from #0 Inverter

The Inverter number specified by the operand B is ignored.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7. (only #0 Inverter responds)

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the response from the Inverter.

Example

D1000

D1001

Data table designation

3020

RW200

RW201

Parameter & status

(any 0 to 63)

4 (mode 4)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

D1010

D1011

RS-485 port

H0030 (fixed)

0 (fixed)

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•

D1000=4 & D1001=3020

⇒

D3020 is specified as the command code setting register and D3021 is specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:

D3020 Command code

D3021 Command data

Signal direction

→

Write

Example operation:

For example, to send the Run forward command to all the Inverters, set the command code HFA00 into D3020 and the value HC400 into D3021.

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

Basic Hardware and Function

253

6F3B0253

7. Instructions

< Note >

(1) The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by user program.

•

The RS-485 port designation is other than H0030 and 0.

•

The Inverter number designation is other than 0 to 63.

•

Operation mode setting for RS-485 port is other than the Inverter connection mode.

(2) This XFER instruction must be programmed in the Main program.

(3) During the instruction input is ON, the data contents in the data table specified by A can be changed.

However, parameters specified by B cannot be changed.

(4) In the Data exchange mode (mode 0) and the Monitor mode (mode 1), the T1-16S scans from #0 to the specified number. Therefore the Inverter number should be consecutive starting with 0.

If an Inverter is disconnected from the network, the T1-16S checks its existence periodically. When you turn off power to an Inverter for maintenance purpose and turn on again, it is recommended to reset the instruction input to re-configure the network.

254

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 8 Special I/O Functions

8.1

Special I/O function overview, 256

8.2

Variable input filter constant, 260

8.3

High speed counter, 261

8.4

Interrupt input function, 268

8.5

Analog setting function, 270

8.6

Pulse output function, 271

8.7

PWM output function, 273

Basic Hardware and Function

255

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.1 Special I/O function overview

The T1-16S supports the special I/O functions as listed below.

Function name

Variable input filter constant

Function summary

Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set by user program. The setting range is 0 to 15ms

High speed counter

(1ms units). Default value is 10ms. This function is applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block).

Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse Single phase up-counter

Single phase speedtrain. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel.

Channel 1

…

X000 count input, X002 reset input

Channel 2

…

X001 count input, X003 reset input

Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling time. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000ms counter

Quadrature bi-pulse counter

(10ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available.

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel.

Channel 1

…

X000 count input

Channel 2

…

X001 count input

Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted

each other. Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts down when phase B precedes.

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz.

Phase A

…

X000

Phase B

…

X001

Reset

……

X002

Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt program when the interrupt input is changed from

Analog setting

OFF to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input are available.

X002

…

Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3)

X003

…

Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4)

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted function into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided on the T1-16S.

…

SW30

…

SW31

Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The available pulse rate is 50 to 5000Hz (1Hz units).

Y020

…

CW or Pulse (PLS)

Y021

…

CCW or Direction (DIR)

PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The available ON duty setting is 0 to 100% (1% units).

Y020

…

PWM output

Remarks

SW16 setting is necessary to use this function. (Note)

Only one among these 4 functions can be selected.

SW16 is used to select the function.

(Note)

No function selection is required.

Either one between these

2 functions can be used.

SW26 is used to select the function. (Note)

256

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Mode setting for the special I/O functions

These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into

SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan.

Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the interrupt input functions respectively.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SW16 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection >

0: INT

1: HSC

Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits A and B < HSC mode >

00: Single phase up-counter

01: Single phase speed-counter

10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT >

00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable

01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable

10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable

11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable

Bit F < Variable input filter constant >

0: No use (fixed to 10ms)

1: Use

Basic Hardware and Function

257

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function.

SW26

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection >

0: PWM

1: P-OUT

Bit 2 < PLS mode >

0: CW/CCW

1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR)

P-OUT / PWM operation error flag

(These are not user setting items)

Bit D < PWM pulse width error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit F < Frequency setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

258

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table,

‘

−

’ means do not care.

Variable input filter constant

Use

SW16

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0

− − − −

0 0

− −

0 0

− − − −

High speed counter

Single phase up-counter

Channel 1 only

Channel 2 only

Both channels

Single phase speed-counter

Channel 1 only

Channel 2 only

Both channels

Quadrature bi-pulse counter

SW16

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

−

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

−

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Interrupt input function

SW16

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON)

Falling (ON to OFF)

Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON)

Falling (ON to OFF)

−

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

−

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

−

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

−

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising

−

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

1 and 2 No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling

−

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising

−

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

No.1 = Falling, No.2 =

−

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Falling

Pulse output function

CW/CCW method

Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method

SW26

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

− − −

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

− − −

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

PWM output function

Use

SW26

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

− − −

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse counter.

(H0803) or

Basic Hardware and Function

259

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.2 Variable input filter constant

Function

The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007 can be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15ms. The default is 10ms.

The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after the second scan.

Related registers

SW16 Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

SW17 Input filter constant value

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

No use (set to 0)

Setting value

0 to 15

Operation

Input signal

T T T T

Internal logic

Scan cycle

X device

T: Input filter constant (0 to 15ms)

Sample program

This program sets the input filter constant to 3ms.

260

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3 High speed counter

8.3.1

Single phase up-counter

Function

When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1.

When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF.

The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into the set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON.

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100

µ s or more (max. 5KHz)

Reset input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

Count input

Reset input

Set value

Count value

Soft-gate

Interrupt enable

Count preset

Channel 1 Channel 2

X000

X002

X001

X003

SW18

SW22

S240

S241

S243

SW20

SW23

S248

S249

S24B

(Note)

Remarks

Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt is enabled when ON

Used to preset the counter value

Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

Channel 1

…

I/O interrupt program #1

Channel 2

…

I/O interrupt program #2

Basic Hardware and Function

261

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Reset input

Soft-gate

Count value

Interrupt

Sample program

(H1003)

Set value

In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase upcounter (channel 1 only) is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to

ON to enable the counter operation.

The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored in SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of

D0100.

262

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.2

Single phase speed-counter

Function

This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during the every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the hold value register.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is

OFF, the hold value is cleared to 0.

The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000ms (10ms units).

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100

µ s or more (max. 5KHz)

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

Count input

Sampling time

Hold value

Soft-gate

Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10ms multiplier)

Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

No interrupt function.

Channel 1 Channel 2

X000 X001

SW18

SW22

S240

SW20

SW23

S248

Remarks

(Note 2)

Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1)

Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Operation is enabled when ON

Basic Hardware and Function

263

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Sampling time

Soft-gate

∆

Internal count value

∆

b c b a

Hold value

∆

d c e d e

Sample program

(H1403)

In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speedcounter (channel 1 only) is selected.

The sampling time is set as 100ms, because 10 is written in SW18.

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works.

The hold value is stored in SW22.

264

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.3

Quadrature bi-pulse counter

Function

This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted 90

each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts down when phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are counted. Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained.

Phase A

Phase B

Up count Down count

When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt program #1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON).

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into the comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON.

The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON.

The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data).

Hardware condition

Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100

µ s or more (max. 5KHz)

Reset input (X002)

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

Phase A

Phase B

Reset input

Comparison value 1

Comparison value 2

Count value

Soft-gate

Interrupt enable 1

Count preset 1

Interrupt enable 2

Count preset 2

X000

X001

X002

SW19

⋅

SW18

SW21

⋅

SW20

SW23

⋅

SW22

S240

S241

S243

S249

S24B

Remarks

Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON

Used to preset the count value

Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON

Used to preset the count value

Basic Hardware and Function

265

8. Special I/O Functions

Interrupt assignment

Comparison value 1

…

I/O interrupt program #1

Comparison value 2

…

I/O interrupt program #2

Operation

Up count

Down count

Reset input

Soft-gate

Count value

Comparison value 1

Comparison value 2

2147483647

-2147483648

Interrupt

1 1 1 2

6F3B0253

266

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

(H0803)

In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse counter is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register

(SW19

⋅

SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21

⋅

SW20).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation.

The count value is stored in SW23

⋅

SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of

D0101

⋅

D0100.

Basic Hardware and Function

267

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.4 Interrupt input function

Function

When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to

OFF), the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately.

Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be selected either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input.

The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2.

Hardware condition

Interrupt input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100

µ s or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Interrupt input 1

Interrupt input 2

X002

X003

Interrupt assignment

Interrupt input 1

…

I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt input 2

…

I/O interrupt program #4

Operation

Interrupt input 1

Interrupt input 2

Interrupt

3 4 3 4

The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs.

268

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

Main program

(H3045)

I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt program A

I/O interrupt program #4

Interrupt program B

In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function

(2 points, rising for both) is selected.

When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When

X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed.

NOTE

Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because the interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states.

Basic Hardware and Function

269

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.5 Analog setting function

Function

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1)

The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function instructions.

Related registers

Function

Adjuster V0

Adjuster V1

SW30 Data range: 0 to 1000

SW31

Operation

Decrease

Increase

Decrease

Increase

V0

SW30 (0 to 1000)

Sample program

V1

SW31 (0 to 1000)

The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0.

270

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.6 Pulse output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).

The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR).

In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000), and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

< CW/CCW mode >

CCW

< PLS/DIR mode >

PLS

DIR

In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the frequency setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency setting) cannot be changed when the pulse enable flag is ON.

This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc.

Related registers

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

CW/CCW

CW pulse

Function

PLS

PLS/DIR

CCW pulse

Pulse enable flag

DIR

Frequency setting register

Frequency setting error flag

Y020

Y021

S270

SW28

S26F

Remarks

Output is enabled when ON

Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000

ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and

50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes

ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting)

Basic Hardware and Function

271

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

Frequency setting

Frequency

100

100Hz

Pulse output

1000

1KHz

300

300Hz

-100

100Hz

-1000

1KHz

-300

300Hz

Sample program

6F3B0253

In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse output function is selected.

When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by

D0100.

If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes

ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped.

272

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

8. Special I/O Functions

8.7 PWM output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).

50% 70% 60% ON duty

PWM

Frequency Cycle time

50 - 100 Hz 20 - 10 ms

200 Hz

1000 Hz

5000 Hz

5 ms

1 ms

200

µ s

Related registers

T T T T = Pulse cycle

The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting value (0 to 100).

The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the pulse enable is ON.

Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100

µ s. Therefore, the controllable

ON duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty setting value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON.

(PWM output operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed)

Available ON duty

0 to 100 %

0, 2 to 98, 100 %

0, 10 to 90, 100 %

0, 50, 100 %

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function

PWM pulse

Pulse enable flag

Frequency setting register

ON duty setting register

Pulse width error flag

ON duty setting error flag

Frequency setting error flag

Y020

S270

SW28

SW29

S26D

S26E

S26F

Remarks

Output is enabled when ON

Data range: 50 to 5000

Data range: 0 to 100

ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting)

Basic Hardware and Function

273

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

ON duty setting

ON duty

PWM output

10 20 30

10%

20%

30%

70%

60%

70%

Sample program

6F3B0253

In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz

PWM output function is selected.

When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by

D0200.

If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped.

274

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 9 Maintenance and Checks

9.1

Precautions during operation, 276

9.2

Daily checks, 277

9.3

Periodic checks, 278

9.4

Maintenance parts, 279

9.5

Battery, 280

Basic Hardware and Function

275

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.1 Precautions during operation

When the T1-16S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items.

operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.

(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity, do not touch the cable ends.

(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1-16S is in operation, even if the terminals are not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.

(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1-16S is in operation. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.

Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used.

(5) Turn off power when a battery installs and removes.

276

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.2 Daily checks

!

CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock.

To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily basis.

Item

Status LEDs

Mode control switch

Input LEDs

Output LEDs

PWR

(power)

Check

Lit when internal 5V is normal.

RUN Lit when operating normally.

FLT (fault) Not lit when operating normally.

Check that the mode control switch is in R (RUN) side. Normal operation is performed when this switch is in R

(RUN) side.

Lit when the corresponding input is

ON.

Lit when the output is ON and the corresponding load should operate.

Corrective measures

If the LEDs are not normal, see

10. Troubleshooting.

Turn this switch to R (RUN) side.

•

Check that the input terminal screw is not loose.

•

Check that the input terminal block is not loose.

•

Check that the input voltage is within the specified range.

•

Check that the output terminal screw is not loose.

•

Check that the output terminal block is not loose.

•

Check that the output voltage is within the specified range.

Basic Hardware and Function

277

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.3 Periodic checks

!

CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock.

Check the T1-16S based on the following items every six months. Also perform checks when the operating environment is changed.

Item

Power supply

Installation condition

Input/output

Check

Measure the power voltage at the T1-

16S’s power terminals.

Check that the terminal screw is not loose.

Check that the power cable is not damaged.

Check that the unit is installed securely.

Check that the I/O module is inserted securely. (if any)

Check that the expansion rack/unit is installed securely. (if any)

Check that the expansion cable is connected securely and the cable is not damaged. (if any)

Check that the I/O module on the expansion rack is inserted securely. (if any)

Measure the input/output voltage at the T1-16S’s terminals.

Check the input status LEDs.

Check the output status LEDs.

Check that the terminal block is installed securely.

Check that the terminal screw is not loose and the terminal has a sufficient distance to the next terminal.

Check that the each I/O wire is not damaged.

Criteria

85 - 132/170 - 264Vac (AC PS)

20.4 - 28.8Vdc (DC PS)

Not loose

Not damaged

Not loose, no play

Not loose, not damaged

Not loose, no play

The voltage must be within the specified range.

The LED must light normally.

Not loose, no play

Not loose, not contacting the next terminal

Not damaged

278

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks

(Periodic checks - continued)

Item

Environment

Programming tool

User program

Check

Check that the temperature, humidity, vibration, dust, etc. are within the specified range.

Check that the functions of the programming tool are normal.

Check that the connector and cable are not damaged.

Check that the T1-16S program and the master program (saved on a floppy disk, etc.) are the same.

Criteria

Must be within the range of general specification.

Monitoring and other operations are available.

Not damaged

No compare error

9.4 Maintenance parts

To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts.

Item

T1-16S basic unit

Programming tool

Master program

Expansion rack or unit (if any)

I/O module

(if any)

Fuse for I/O module (if any)

Battery (CR2032)

Quantity

As required

One of each type used

Remarks

Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time of the controlled system.

Useful for the troubleshooting procedure.

Saved on a floppy disk, etc.

These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations.

Basic Hardware and Function

279

6F3B0253

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.5 Battery

(1) Install

+ side

Insert the battery by an angle of 45°.

(Turn + side into an upside.)

(1) Push the battery horizontal direction.

(2) Push from upside and lock.

(2) Eject

Push the center of the tab by a finger or a pen. Then the battery will be unlocked.

Remove the battery.

NOTE

1. Turn off power when installing or removing the battery for safety.

2. The battery type is CR2032. Do not use other types of battery. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.

3. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

280

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Section 10 Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 282

10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 288

Basic Hardware and Function

281

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure

!

CAUTION

1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1 and related equipment.

4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed. Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.

If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try to determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system.

If the problem is found in the T1-16S, check the following points:

PWR (power) LED

Lit

RUN LED

Lit

User program

Normal operation

Input operation

Normal operation

Output operation

Not lit

Not normal

Follow the procedure in

10.1.1 Power supply check

Follow the procedure in

10.1.2 CPU check

Follow the procedure in

10.1.3 Program check

Follow the procedure in

10.1.4 Input check

Follow the procedure in

10.1.5 Output check

Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem.

282

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.1 Power supply check

If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points.

Check the power connection

Correct

Check the power voltage at the T1-16S’s terminal

Normal

Remove the programmer port connector

Still unlit

Remove the 24Vdc service power terminals if it is used

Still unlit

Remove the I/O modules.

Lit

Confirm the internal 5Vdc current consumption if

I/O module is used.

Within the limit

Insert the removed option modules one by one to pinpoint the faulty card.

Connection terminals are correct.

The terminal screws are not loose.

The terminal block is installed securely.

85 to 132/170 to 264Vac (50/60 Hz) or 20.4 to 28.8Vdc (DC power)

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the internal 5Vdc can be shorted in the external connections of this port.

If the PWR LED becomes normal, the

24Vdc service power can be over load.

If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1-16S basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit.

The 5Vdc capacity for I/O modules is max. 1.5A.

(Refer to section 2.1.)

Replace the faulty I/O module.

Basic Hardware and Function

283

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.2 CPU check

If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points.

Check the position of the mode control switch

If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the switch to R (RUN) position.

Check the FLT (fault) LED programming

Is the RUN LED blinking ?

whether the not used.

Connect the programming tool, and check the T1-16S’s status

If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error message by connecting the tool. Refer to section 10.2.

If it is blinking, the T1-16S is in the HOLD mode. Check your program

HOLD device (S401) is

If the T1-16S stays in HALT mode even when the mode control switch is changed, the switch may be faulty.

If the communication between the T1-16S and the programming tool is not possible, the T1-16S may be faulty.

10.1.3 Program check

Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation does not work as intended.

(1) Whether duplicated coils are not programmed.

(2) Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not overlapping.

(3) Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the

T1-16S’s scan time.

(4) Whether a register/device, which is used in the main program, is not operated erroneously in the interrupt program.

NOTE

When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the

EEPROM write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the old program stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your program modification will disappear.

284

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.4 Input check

If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the following points:

Is the input status LED changed ON/OFF according to the corresponding input device operation ?

Yes

Connect the programming tool, and monitor the corresponding X device state

Not normal

Check whether the X device is forced or not

Not forced

Check whether the I/O allocation table is identical to the actual I/O configuration

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O allocation, and check whether the I/O allocation table is now identical to the actual I/O configuration

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for a specific I/O module?

If not, check the input voltage at the

T1-16S’s input terminals.

If the voltage is not normal, check the input device and the cable.

If the voltage is normal, the T1-16S’s input circuit may be faulty.

If the monitored X device state is identical to the state of the input status LED, the cause may lie in the user program or in the environment.

If it is forced, release the force designation then execute the EEPROM write operation.

If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or the input circuit may be faulty.

If it becomes identical, execute the

EEPROM write operation.

If so, the card, module or expansion unit may be faulty. For expansion unit, check the expansion cable also.

Basic Hardware and Function

285

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.5 Output check

If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external output device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points:

Is the output status LED changed ON/OFF according to the program execution ?

Yes

Check the voltage between the output terminal and its common terminal.

It should be 0V when the output is ON, and it should be the circuit voltage when the output is OFF.

Normal

Check the voltage at the load

If it is the circuit voltage at the output is

ON, or if it is 0V at the output is OFF with the load ON, the T1-16S’s output circuit may be faulty.

If it is 0V and the load is also OFF, check the output power and the output cable connections.

If it is not normal, check the output cable connections.

If it is normal, check the specification of the load, also check environmental factors.

If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or the output circuit may be faulty.

Check whether the I/O allocation table is identical to the actual I/O configuration

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O allocation, and check whether the I/O allocation table is now identical to the actual I/O configuration

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for a specific I/O module?

If it becomes identical, execute the

EEPROM write operation.

If so, the card, module or expansion unit may be faulty. For expansion unit, check the expansion cable also.

286

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.6 Environmental problem

If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible environmental factors.

(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices:

The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of the problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3.

(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding equipment or high-frequency equipment:

The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause the problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system.

Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation.

(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery:

The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation status of the units and take necessary measures.

(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced:

Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module.

Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature is beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed.

Basic Hardware and Function

287

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

10.2 Self-diagnostic items

If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1-16S CPU, the error messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded in the T1-16S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation is not possible, the T1-16S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR mode).

The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered)

If the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the T1-

16S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool.

(An example of the event history)

Date

98-02-21

98-01-15

98-01-14

< Event History>

Time Event

16:48:01

15:55:26

12:03:34

09:27:12

19:11:43

10:39:11

I/O no answer

System power on

System power off

System power on

System power off

No END/IRET error

Count Info 1

#00-04

M-001

Info 2

H0024

Info 3 Mode

RUN Down

INIT.

RUN

INIT.

HALT

HALT Down

In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded.

Each column shows the following information.

Date: The date when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)

Time: The time when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)

Event: Error message

Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action

Info n: Related information to the error detected

Mode: T1-16S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the power-up initialization)

Down: Shows the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected

If the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not accepted.

In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the

HALT mode before starting the correction operation.

288

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Event Info 1 Info 2

Batt voltage drop

Boundary error Program type -

Address in the block No. block

Special

Info 3 device

Meaning and countermeasures

S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity of RAM (back-up area) has been detected.

If retentive registers are used, these validity are not guaranteed. (No error down)

FUN No.

The register of index modification is other than RW, T, C and D. (Error down)

S064 The register designated by index modification has exceeded the allowable range. That is, out of RW, T, C and D.

(No error down)

Check the value of the index register.

Clock-calendar error S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal.

(No error down)

Set the date and time.

(

Enhanced model only)

Duplicate entry No.

Program type block No.

EEPROM BCC error Illegal

BCC

EEPROM warning

I/O bus error

I/O mismatch

I/O no answer

I/O parity error

Illegal I/O reg

Number of excess writing

Address in the block

Unit No.

Data

Unit No. slot No.

No.

Entry No.

Multiple SUBR instructions which have the same subroutine number are programmed.

(Error down)

Check the program.

BCC error has been detected in the user S004

S013 program of the EEPROM. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM write operation again.

S007 The number of times of writing into

S005

S020

EEPROM has exceeded the life (100,000 times). (No error down)

Replace the unit because the data reliability of the EEPROM will decrease.

An abnormality has been detected in I/O bus checking. (Error down)

S005

S021

Check the expansion cable connection and

I/O module mounting status.

The I/O allocation information and the actual I/O configuration are not identical.

(Error down)

Check the I/O allocation and the I/O module mounting status.

S005

S022

S005

S023

S005

S021

No response from the T2 I/O module has been received. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation, the expansion cable connection and the T2 I/O module mounting status.

I/O bus parity error has been detected in data read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error down)

Check the expansion cable connection and the T2 I/O module mounting status.

The allocated I/O register address exceeds the limit, 32 words. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation.

Basic Hardware and Function

289

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Event Info 1 Info 2

Illegal inst Program type block No.

Address in the block

Special

Info 3 device

S006

S030

S060

Illegal sys intrpt

Invalid Fun inst

Invalid program

Loop nesting error

Memory full

No END/IRET error

No RET error

No sub-r entry

Interrupt address 1

Program type block No.

Interrupt address 2

Address in the block

Fun No.

Sub-r No.

Meaning and countermeasures

An illegal instruction has been detected in the program. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM write operation again.

Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the unit.

A function instruction which is not supported by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

A basic ladder instruction which is not supported by the T1-16S is programmed.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

SUBR instruction is not programmed before

RET instruction. (Error down)

Correct the program.

An abnormality is detected in the program management information. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM write operation again.

A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The program exceeds the executable memory capacity. (Error down)

Reduce the program steps.

The END instruction is not programmed in the main program or in the sub-program.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

The IRET instruction is not programmed in the interrupt program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The RET instruction is not programmed in the subroutine program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The subroutine corresponding to CALL instruction is not programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

290

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Event Info 1 Info 2

Operand error Program type block No.

Address in the block

Special

Info 3 device

Pair inst error

Peripheral LSI err

Program BCC error

RAM check error

Scan time over

Program type block No.

Error code

Illegal

BCC

Error address

Scan time

Address in the block

Error data Test data

S004

S016

S006

S030

S004

S012

S006

S031

Meaning and countermeasures

A register/device which is not supported by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The timer or counter register is duplicated in the program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The subroutine number programmed with

CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the range. (Error down)

0 to 255

Correct the program.

Index modification is programmed for instructions in which the index modification is not allowed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR,

JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error down)

Correct the program.

A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other

MCS-MCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other

JCS-JCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

CPU hardware error has been detected in the power-up initialization. (Error down and programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after power OFF and ON again.

BCC error has been detected in the user program in the RAM. (Error down)

If the error remains after power OFF and

ON again, reload the program and execute

EEPROM write operation.

In the power-up initialization, an error has detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error down)

Replace the unit if the error remains after power OFF and ON again.

The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error down)

Correct the program to reduce the scan time or use WDT instruction to extend the check time.

Basic Hardware and Function

291

6F3B0253

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information

Event Info 1 Info 2

Sys RAM check err Error address

Info 3

Error data Test data

Special device

S004

S011

Sys ROM BCC error

System power off

System power on

Sub-r nesting err

WD timer error

Illegal

BCC

Program type block No.

Address in the block

Address 1 Address 2

Sub-r No.

S004

S010

S004

S01F

Meaning and countermeasures

In the power-up initialization, an error has detected by system RAM read/write checking. (Error down and programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after power OFF and ON again.

BCC error has been detected in the system program in the ROM. (Error down and programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after power OFF and ON again.

Power OFF (no error)

Power ON (no error)

The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3 levels.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

The watchdog timer error has occurred.

(Error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the unit.

292

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Appendix

A.1

List of models and types, 294

A.2

Instruction index, 295

Basic Hardware and Function

293

6F3B0253

Appendix

A.1 List of models and types

•

Basic unit

Model Power supply Input type RTC/RS-485

T1-16S 100 – 240Vac 24Vdc Yes

24Vdc Yes

Type code

T1-MDR16SS

T1-MDR16SC

Part number

TDR116S6S

TDR116S6C

T1-MDR16SSD TDR116S3S

T1-MDR16SCD TDR116S3C

•

I/O module

16 points 24Vdc input

Description

16 points 24Vdc output

8 points 24Vdc input and 8 points 24Vdc output

8 points relay output

1 channel analog input, 0 – 5V/0 - 20mA

1 channel analog input,

10V

1 channel analog output, 0 – 20mA

1 channel analog output,

10V

1 channel thermo couple input, K/E/J

TOSLINE-F10 remote station

Type code

DI116M

DO116M

DD116M

RO108M

AD121M

AD131M

DA121M

DA131M

TC111M

FR112M

Part number

TDI116M

∗

TDO116M

∗

TDD116M

∗

TRO108M

∗

TAD121M

∗

TAD131M

∗

TDA121M

∗

TDA131M

∗

TTC111M

∗

TFR112M

∗

•

Peripherals

Description

Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S)

T-PDS software (Windows version)

Program storage module

Multi-drop adapter for computer link

•

Cable and others

Description

T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length

HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts)

RS-232C connector for computer link

(with 2 m cable)

I/O module I/O connector for

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, soldering type

I/O module I/O connector for

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, flat cable type

Type code

HP911A

Part number

THP911A

∗

T-PDS Windows TMW33E2SS

RM102

CU111

TRM102

∗∗

TCU111

∗∗

Type code

CJ105

CJ102

PT16S

PT15S

PT15F

Part number

TCJ105

∗

TCJ102

∗

TPT16S

∗

TPT15S

∗

TPT15F

∗

294

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Appendix

A.2 Instruction index

•

Instruction name

1 bit rotate left

1 bit rotate right

1 bit shift left

1 bit shift right

2’s complement

7-segment decode

Absolute value

Addition

Addition with carry

AND

ASCII conversion

ASCII to Hex conversion

Average value

BCD conversion

Bi-directional shift register

Binary conversion

Bit count

Bit test

Calendar operation

Coil

Counter

Data exchange

Data transfer

Decode

Decrement

Demultiplexer

Device/register reset

Device/register set

Digital filter

Direct I/O

Disable interrupt

Division

Double-word 2’s complement

Double-word addition

Double-word data transfer

Double-word equal

Double-word greater than

137

286

284

Double-word greater than or equal 285

Double-word less than 288

Double-word less than or equal

Double-word not equal

289

287

196

160

239

209

146

233

147

Double-word subtraction

Enable interrupt

Encode

End

Equal

148

208

200

135

180

132

139

136

201

155

177

197

228

238

170

237

202

163

218

121

173

172

165

164

232

234

231

143

149

156

236

162

Exclusive OR

Expanded data transfer

Flip-flop

FOR

Forced coil

Function generator

Greater than

Greater than or equal

Hex to ASCII conversion

Increment

Interrupt return

Invert coil

Invert transfer

Inverter

Jump control reset

Jump control set

Less than

Less than or equal

Lower limit

Master control reset

Master control set

Maximum value

Minimum value

Moving average

Multiplexer

Multiplication n bit rotate left n bit rotate right n bit shift left n bit shift right

NC contact

Negative pulse coil

Negative pulse contact

NO contact

Not equal

OFF delay timer

ON delay timer

Positive pulse coil

Positive pulse contact

Pre-derivative real PID

Reset carry

Set calendar

Set carry

Shift register

117

181

130

129

157

127

125

174

167

166

118

128

126

206

219

199

217

198

168

133

226

227

159

176

145

175

138

123

134

182

183

225

133

158

241

215

205

122

229

178

179

161

154

210

124

Basic Hardware and Function

295

Single shot timer

Special module data read

Special module data write

Step sequence initialize

Step sequence input

Step sequence output

Subroutine call

Subroutine entry

Subroutine return

Subtraction

Subtraction with carry

Table initialize

Table invert transfer

Table transfer

Transitional contact (falling)

Transitional contact (rising)

Unsigned division

Unsigned double/single division

Unsigned equal

Unsigned greater than

Unsigned greater than or equal

Unsigned less than

Unsigned less than or equal

Unsigned multiplication

Unsigned not equal

Up-down counter

Upper limit

Watchdog timer reset

190

191

194

195

151

193

216

224

211

140

142

141

120

119

152

153

192

131

245

247

212

213

214

203

207

204

144

150

6F3B0253

Appendix

296

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Appendix

•

Instruction symbol

D-

D<=

D<>

D>=

DEC

DFL

DIV

201

160

209

153

DMOV 137

DNEG 233

DPX 177

148

188

189

187

186

184

185

DSR

ENC

END

EOR

F/F

170

208

200

135

158

215

-C

∗

-1

7SEG 234

ABS 231

AND 156

ASC 236

ATOH 162

AVE

228

202

BCD

BIN

CALL

238

237

203

CLDN 217

CLDS 218

CNT

D+

132

147

150

146

182

183

181

180

178

179

145

143

154

149

144

155

RTL

RTL1

RTR

RTR1

175

173

174

172

SET 196

SETC 198

SHL 167

SHL1

SHR

165

166

SHR1 164

SR 168

STIN

131

213

STIZ 212

STOT 214

SUBR 207

TEST 163

TINZ 140

TMOV 141

TNOT 142

TOF

TON

∗

130

129

151

152

FG 229

FOR 205

HTOA 161

I/O

IRET

JCR

239

210

134

JCS

134

225

MAVE 159

MAX 226

MCR

MCS

MIN

MOV

133

227

136

MPX

NEG

176

232

NEXT 206

NOT

138

157

PID3 219

RET

RST

204

197

RSTC 199

U/D

U<=

216

194

195

U<>

193

192

190

U>=

191

224

WDT 211

WRITE 247

XCHG 139

XFER 241

Basic Hardware and Function

297

298

T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

Industrial Equipment Department

1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-ku

Tokyo 105-8001, JAPAN

Tel: 03-3457-4900 Fax: 03-5444-9268

Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF